FF230001
Owner’s Manual

BL00005235-200 EN

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure thatyou have read this manual and understood its contents before using the camera. Keep the manual where it will beread by all who use the product.
For the Latest Information
The latest versions of the manuals are available from:https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website can be accessed not only fromyour computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/iiP Chapter Index
Menu List

iv

1 Before You Begin1

2 First Steps

39

3 Basic Photography and Playback

59

4 Movie Recording and Playback

67

5 Taking Photographs

75

6 The Shooting Menus

125

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

213

8 Network/USB Setting Menus

241

9 The Setup Menus

331

10 Shortcuts

375

11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories

393

12 Technical Notes

419

iii

Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.

Menu List

Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.

N See page 125 for details.
Photo Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
1⁄4
FILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTCOLOR CHROME FX BLUESMOOTH SKIN EFFECTDYNAMIC RANGED RANGE PRIORITY
2⁄4
WHITE BALANCETONE CURVECOLORSHARPNESSiv

P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGP

126
HIGH ISO NR
140
127
CLARITY
141
128
LONG EXPOSURE NR
141
129
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
141
3⁄4
130
COLOR SPACE
141
132
142
xF PIXEL MAPPING
132
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 142
133
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 142
133 4⁄4 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 143
133
134
135
136
140
140
140

Menu Listv

Menu List

P A SHOOTING SETTINGPG AF/MF SETTING
SELF-TIMER
164
FOCUS AREA
146
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING165
AF MODE146
SELF-TIMER LAMP
165
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING146
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
166
AF MODE ALL SETTING
146
1⁄3
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
147 1⁄3 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING168
EXPOSURE SMOOTHINGSTORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 150
INTERVALPRIORITY
MODE
168
151
AF POINT DISPLAYyz
AE
BKT
SETTING
169
151
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
FILM SIMULATION BKT169
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS151
FOCUS BKT SETTING
169
PRE-AF
152
PHOTOMETRY169
152
xF AF ILLUMINATORSHUTTER TYPE
170
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 153
171
2⁄3 SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
155 2⁄3 FLICKER REDUCTIONFLICKERLESSS.S.
SETTING
171
AF+MF
157
ISO
171
MF ASSIST
158
IS MODE172
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &158
35mm FORMAT MODE
172
FOCUS RING
173
xF COOLING FAN SETTING
FOCUS CHECK
159
3⁄3xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 173
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 159
159 F FLASH SETTINGxF INSTANT AF SETTINGP
160 FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
3⁄3 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
174
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
160 RED EYE REMOVAL
174
161 TTL-LOCK MODExF AF RANGE LIMITER
175
TOUCH SCREEN MODE
162 LED LIGHT SETTING
175
COMMANDER SETTING
176
CH SETTING
176

Movie Menus

N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still

photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items ineither menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

Menu ListPP H IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGB MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
177
194
F FILM SIMULATIONIMAGE FORMAT
177
194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
MOVIE MODE
178
195
F DYNAMIC RANGEHIGH SPEED REC
179
195
F
WHITE
BALANCE1⁄4
180 1⁄2 F TONE CURVEF SELF-TIMER
195
MEDIA REC SETTING
181
195
F COLORHDMI OUTPUT SETTING184
196
F SHARPNESSFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
185
196
F HIGH ISO NR
F-Log/HLG RECORDING186
INTERFRAME NR
196
DATA LEVEL SETTING
187
196
xF PIXEL MAPPING
187 2⁄2 F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY
F PHOTOMETRY
197
187
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
197
PERIPHERAL
LIGHT
CORRECTION
F
2⁄4
188
F IS MODExF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 197
188
F IS MODE BOOST
189
F ISO
ZEBRA SETTING189
ZEBRA LEVEL189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 191
191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR
3⁄4 TALLY LIGHT
192
193
xF COOLING FAN SETTINGF EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM
193
SETTING4⁄4 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 193

vi

Menu List

P P AUDIO SETTINGPINTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 205
198
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUST198
205
MENT
199
MIC
JACK
SETTING
206
199
MIC
LEVEL
LIMITER
206
1⁄2
200
WIND FILTER
206
200
LOW CUT FILTER
207
HEADPHONES VOLUME
207
200
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
207
208
201 2⁄2 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
201 Q TIME CODE SETTINGP

201 TIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
202
COUNT UP SETTING
202 DROP FRAME
202 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
202 TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
203
204

209
209
210
210
211
211

vii

Menu List

G AF/MF SETTINGF FOCUS AREA
F AF MODE
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGxF WRAP FOCUS POINT
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTINGF SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTINGF AF+MF
F MF ASSISTF INTERLOCK MF ASSIST &FOCUS RINGF FOCUS CHECK
2⁄2 xF INSTANT AF SETTINGxF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
xF AF RANGE LIMITERF TOUCH SCREEN MODE
FOCUS CHECK LOCKThe Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.

N See page 220 for details.
Menu List

C PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
1⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECT

viii

P C PLAY BACK MENUP
220
IMAGE ROTATE
229
221
VOICE MEMO SETTING
230
223
RATING
231
224
COPY
232
2⁄3
226
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 233
226
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 235
227
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK235
228
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
236
PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
238
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT
239
DISP ASPECT240

Menu List

Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.

N See page 331 for details.
P D SOUND SETTINGP

AF BEEP VOL.
338
332
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
338
333
OPERATION VOL.
339
333
339
F REC START/STOP VOLUME
334
335 1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
339
VOLUME335
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
335
340
SOUND
336
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 340
336
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 340
337
341
337 2⁄2 PLAYBACK VOLUME
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
341

ix

Menu List

D USER SETTINGFORMATb AREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
1⁄2
Qa
x MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGBATTERY AGE
2⁄2 RESETREGULATORY

Menu List

P D SCREEN SETTINGPD SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
342
LOCATION INFO353
EVF BRIGHTNESS
342
SUB MONITOR SETTING353
EVF COLOR
342 4⁄4 SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR 356
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
343
356
x Q MENU BACKGROUND
1⁄4
LCD BRIGHTNESS
344
356
F Q MENU BACKGROUNDLCD COLOR
344
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
344
IMAGE DISP.
345
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW
346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST
347
2⁄4ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
347
FRAMING GUIDELINE
347
AUTOROTATE PB
348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION
348
FOCUS SCALE UNITS
348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
349
3⁄4
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
352

x

Menu List

P D POWER MANAGEMENT
357 AUTO POWER OFF
357 PERFORMANCE
357 SHOOTING STAND BY MODE
358 AUTO POWER SAVE
358 AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
359 D SAVE DATA SETTING
359
FRAME NO.
359
EDIT FILE NAME
360
x CARD SLOT SETTING360
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
360 1⁄2 SELECT FOLDER
361
COPYRIGHT INFO
361
DEFAULT CAPTION
361
IPTC
362 2⁄2 GEOTAGGING
362
363
364
365

P

366
367
368
368
368
P

369
370
370
370
371
371
372
372
373

xi

Menu List

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUF EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUFUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
1⁄3
COMMAND DIAL SETTINGo S.S. OPERATIONCOMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
SHUTTER AE
SHOOT WITHOUT LENSSHOOT WITHOUT CARD
FOCUS RING
2⁄3
FOCUS RING OPERATION
AE/AF-LOCK MODE
AWB-LOCK MODE
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
3⁄3 TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGLOCKThe Network/USB Settings Menu
Adjust camera network and USB settings.

Menu ListP
I NETWORK/USB SETTINGCREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
318
AIRPLANE MODE
319
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 320
1⁄2 instax PRINTER CONNECTION
323
SETTING
Frame.io Camera to Cloud323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM
328
SETTINGINFORMATION
329
2⁄2
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
329

xii

P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ........................................................................xii
Supplied Accessories ..................................................................................xxvii
About This Manual......................................................................................xxviii
Symbols and Conventions .................................................................................xxviii
Terminology ................................................................................................................xxviii

1 Before You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................6
The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable).....................................................6
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................6
The Mode Dial ....................................................................................................................7
The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch ...............................................................................8
The DRIVE Button .............................................................................................................8
The Command Dials.......................................................................................................9The Indicator Lamp...................................................................................................... 10
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 11
The Viewfinder .................................................................................................. 12
Attaching the Viewfinder ......................................................................................... 13
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 14
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 15
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 16
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 16
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 18
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 20
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 22
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 22
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 22

xiii

The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 24
Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 25
Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 27
The Secondary LCD Monitor .................................................................................. 28
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 32
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 32
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 33
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 34
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 34
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 38

2 First Steps

39

3 Basic Photography and Playback

59

4 Movie Recording and Playback

67

Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 40
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 41
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 43
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 45
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 47
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 48
Using an external SSD in place of a memory card ................................... 49
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 50
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 54
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 55
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 56
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 58
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 58

Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 60
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 63
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 64
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 66

Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 68
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 72
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 73

xiv

Table of Contents

5 Taking Photographs

75

6 The Shooting Menus

125

P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 76
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 76
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 78
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 80
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 82
Custom Modes ............................................................................................................... 86
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 92
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 93
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 95
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 97
Manual Focus...................................................................................................101
Checking Focus ........................................................................................................... 103
Sensitivity..........................................................................................................106
AUTO .................................................................................................................................. 107
Metering ............................................................................................................108
Exposure Compensation .............................................................................109
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................110
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 111
Bracketing .........................................................................................................112
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 113
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 113
s Bracketing ............................................................................................................... 114
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................117
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................119
Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot ....................................................................................121

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................126
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 126
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 127
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 128
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 129
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 130
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 132
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 132

xv

COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 133
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 133
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 133
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 134
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 135
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 136
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 140
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 140
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 140
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 140
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 141
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 141
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 141
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 141
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 142
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 142
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 142
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 143
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................146
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 146
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 146
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING ....................................................................................... 146
AF MODE ALL SETTING .......................................................................................... 146
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 147
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 150
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 151
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 151
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 151
PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 152
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 152
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 153
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 155
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 157
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 158
INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING .......................................................... 158
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 159

xvi

Table of Contents

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 159
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 159
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 160
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 160
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 161
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 162
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................164
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 164
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 165
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 165
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 166
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 168
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 168
AE BKT SETTING .......................................................................................................... 169
FILM SIMULATION BKT ............................................................................................ 169
FOCUS BKT SETTING ................................................................................................ 169
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 169
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 170
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 171
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 171
ISO ....................................................................................................................................... 171
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 172
35mm FORMAT MODE ........................................................................................... 172
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 173
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 173
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................174
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 174
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 174
TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 175
LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 175
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 176
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 176
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................177
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 177
IMAGE FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 178

xvii

HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 179
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 180
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 181
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 184
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 185
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 186
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 187
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 187
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 187
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 188
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 188
F ISO ................................................................................................................................ 189
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 189
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 189
WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE ................................................................................ 190
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 191
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 191
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 192
xF COOLING FAN SETTING ............................................................................ 193
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 193
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 193
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 193
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................194
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 194
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 194
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 195
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 195
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 195
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 195
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 196
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 196
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 196
xF PIXEL MAPPING ............................................................................................. 196
F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY ................................................................................... 197
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 197
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 197

xviii

Table of Contents

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................198
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 198
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 198
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 199
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 199
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 200
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 200
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 200
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 201
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 201
F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING ................................................... 201
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 202
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 202
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 202
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 202
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 203
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 204
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................205
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 205
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 205
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 206
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 206
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 206
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 207
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 207
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE ............................................................................................ 207
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 208
TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................209
TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 209
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 209
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 210
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 210
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 211
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING .................................................................................. 211

xix

7 Playback and the Playback Menu

213

8 Network/USB Setting Menus

241

The Playback Display ....................................................................................214
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 216
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................218
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 219
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 219
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................220
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 220
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 221
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 223
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 224
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 226
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 226
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 227
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 228
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 229
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 230
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 231
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 232
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 233
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 235
DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACK ........................................................................ 235
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 236
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 238
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 239
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 240

Overview ...........................................................................................................242
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 242
Connection Setting Profiles................................................................................. 246

xx

Table of Contents

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................247
Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 247
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 247
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 249
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259
Tethered Photography .................................................................................260
Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 262
Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)................................... 267
Uploading Files to Frame.io........................................................................270
Connecting via Wireless LAN .............................................................................. 270
Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) ........................................................... 272
Uploading Items to Frame.io .............................................................................. 275
Uploading Files via FTP ................................................................................278
Connecting to FTP Servers................................................................................... 278
Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers ................................ 285
Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers .................................................................. 288
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................291
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................292
Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser ................................293
Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser ................................... 293
Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet .................... 303
The Remote Recording Display......................................................................... 306
Recording Movies Remotely ............................................................................... 310
Viewing Movies ........................................................................................................... 310
Saving and Loading Camera Settings ........................................................... 311

xxi

Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................313
CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING............................................................ 313
SELECT CONNECTION SETTING ........................................................................ 318
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 319
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 320
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 323
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 323
FTP OPTIONAL SETTING......................................................................................... 326
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 328
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 329
RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING ........................................................................ 329

9 The Setup Menus

331

USER SETTING .................................................................................................332
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 332
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 333
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 333
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 334
Qa ............................................................................................................... 335
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 335
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 335
SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 336
BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 336
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 337
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 337
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................338
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 338
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 338
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 339
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 339
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 340
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 340
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 341
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 341

xxii

Table of Contents

SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................342
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 342
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 342
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 343
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 344
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 344
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 344
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 345
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 345
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 346
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 346
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 347
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 347
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 347
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 348
PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION ................................................................................ 348
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 348
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 349
EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION ................................................................ 349
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 349
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 350
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 351
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 352
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 352
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR SETTING ......................................................................................... 353
SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR .......................................................... 356
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 356
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................357
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 357
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 357
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 358
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 358

xxiii

o S.S. OPERATION ................................................................................................... 359
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 359
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 359
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 360
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 360
FOCUS RING .................................................................................................................. 361
FOCUS RING OPERATION ...................................................................................... 361
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 361
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 362
EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING ........................................................................ 362
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 363
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 364
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 365
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................366
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 366
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 367
SHOOTING STAND BY MODE .............................................................................. 368
AUTO POWER SAVE ................................................................................................... 368
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 368
SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................369
FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 369
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 370
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 370
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 370
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 371
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 371
DEFAULT CAPTION..................................................................................................... 372
IPTC ..................................................................................................................................... 372
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 373

xxiv

Table of Contents

10Shortcuts

375

11Peripherals and Optional Accessories

393

Shortcut Options ............................................................................................376
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................377
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 377
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................379
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 379
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 381
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 382
Function Controls...........................................................................................385
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 385
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 390

Lenses.................................................................................................................394
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 394
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 395
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 395
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 395
Aperture Rings ............................................................................................................. 396
T/S Lenses ....................................................................................................................... 396
Viewfinder Tilt Adapters ..............................................................................397
Attaching the EVF-TL1............................................................................................. 398
Using the EVF-TL1 ...................................................................................................... 399
External Flash Units .......................................................................................400
Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 401
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 402
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 403
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 406
Vertical Battery Grips ....................................................................................410
Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip ................................................................. 411
Inserting and Removing Batteries ................................................................... 413
Charging the Batteries ............................................................................................ 415
Cooling Fans ....................................................................................................416
Attaching a Cooling Fan ........................................................................................ 416
Using the Fan................................................................................................................ 418

xxv

Table of Contents

12Technical Notes

419

Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................420
Software and Services for Use with Your Camera...............................423
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 423
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 423
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 424
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 424
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 424
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 424
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 425
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 425
Frame.io Camera to Cloud.................................................................................... 425
For Your Safety ................................................................................................426
Product Care ....................................................................................................437
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................438
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................439
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 439
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................440
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................452
Errors...................................................................................................................457
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................460
Specifications ..................................................................................................461

xxvi

Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:• NP-W235 rechargeable battery

O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; besure to charge the battery before use (P 50).

• AC-5VJ AC power adapter• Plug adapter• Interchangeable electronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)• Body cap (comes attached to camera)• Shoulder strap• Cable protector• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)• Vertical battery grip connector cover (comes attached tocamera)• Cooling fan connector cover (comes attached to camera)
O The EVF-GFX3 is for the GFX100 II only.
N • The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 423).

xxvii

About This ManualThis manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM GFX100 II
digital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its
contents before proceeding.
Symbols and Conventions
The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
Additional
information that may be helpful when using theNproduct.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model ofcamera described in this manual.
Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Type B CFexpress memory
cards the camera uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The electronic viewfinder may be referred to as the“EVF” and the LCD monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets
are referred to as “smartphones”.

xxviiiBefore You Begin

1

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

A Secondary monitor backlight button.......31 P Fn6 button .....................................................385
B Fn4 button .....................................................385 Q Fn5 button .....................................................385
C Secondary LCD monitor................................28 R Front command dial...............................9, 358
D Microphone ......................................................68 S ON/OFF switch .................................................54
E Hot shoe .........................................................401 T Shutter button .................................................62
F Dial lock release .......................................60, 68 U Fn1 button .....................................................385
G Mode dial ............................................................7 V Fn2 button .....................................................385
H STILL/MOVIE mode switch
W Fn3 button .....................................................385.............................................................. 8, 60, 68 X Hot shoe cover ..............................................401
I Strap eyelet .......................................................40 Y Body cap............................................................41
Z LAN connector
J LAN connector covera Microphone/remote release connector
K Connector cover(⌀3.5mm) ...............................................71, 85
L AF-assist illuminator...................................152
Self-timer lamp ............................................164 b HDMI connector (Type A) .............................64
Tally light ........................................................192 c USB connector (Type-C) ...............................50
M Sync terminal ................................................402 d Hole to screw USB cable
N Lens signal contacts
e Hole to screw cable protector
O Lens release button ........................................41

O a Use of an optional RR-100 remote release requires a third-party

adapter to convert the three-pin, ⌀2.5 mm connector to a threepin, ⌀3.5 mm connector.

2

Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

f DRIVE button......................................................8 t a (playback) button ...................................63g b (delete) button ...........................................66 u Speaker .................................................... 73, 341
h Focus mode selector ......................................93 v MENU/OK button .............................................32
i AFON button .........................................111, 385 w AEL (exposure lock) button ..............111, 385
j Rear command dial .......................9, 218, 358 x Focus stick (focus lever)...................6, 98, 357
k Q (quick menu) button ...............................379 y Tripod mountl Indicator lamp ....................................... 10, 192 z Vertical battery grip connector cover ....411
Tally light ........................................................192 0 Tilt lock release ................................................11m Headphone jack cover
1 LCD monitor .......................................11, 18, 20
Touch screen .................................34, 162, 203
n Memory card slot cover latch......................45o Memory card slot cover (detachable)
2 Headphone jack (⌀3.5mm) ......................207..................................................................... 6, 45 3 Memory card slot 1(for Type B CFexpress cards)......................45
p Battery-chamber cover latch ......................43
q Hole to hook Vertical Battery Grip
4 Memory card slot 2(for SD memory cards) ...............................45
r Battery-chamber cover .................................43s DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 22, 216

3

1
Before You Begin

5 Battery latch ....................................................44 9 Hole to screw cooling fan..........................416
6 Battery chamber .............................................43 - Serial number plate..........................................6
7 Cooling fan connector cover ....................416 ^ Vertical battery grip connector................411
8 Cooling fan connector ...............................4164

Parts of the Camera

The Cable Protector
Attach the protector as shown to prevent accidental disconnection.
A Slide the protector over the USB connector cover so that the coverpasses through the slot in the protector.
B Tighten the lock screw.
C Connect the cable and pass it through the protector as shown.

1
Before You Begin

5

The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,which provides the CMIIT ID, serial number, and other important information.

1

Serial number plate

Before You Begin

The Memory Card Slot Cover (Detachable)
The memory card slot cover can be removed by lowering the interior latch. Remove the cover for ease of access whena camera rig is attached or in other situations that make it difficult to open or
close the cover.
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)
Tilt or press the focus stick to select the focus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.

N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the center of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.

6

Parts of the Camera

The Mode Dial
To select a shooting mode, rotate the dial until
the icon for the desired mode aligns with theindex.

1
Description

P

Aperture and shutter speed can be ad76
justed using program shift.

B S (SHUTTER PRIORITY AE)

Select for full control over camera set- 78
tings, including aperture (M and A) 80
and/or shutter speed (M and S).
82

A (APERTURE PRIORITY AE)
M (MANUAL)

C C1/C2/C3/C4/C5/C6(CUSTOM 1/2/3/4/5/6)

Take pictures using previously-stored86
settings.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

7

Before You BeginMode

A P (PROGRAM AE)

The STILL/MOVIE Mode Switch
Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to STILL
to take photographs or to MOVIE to record
movies.

1
Before You Begin

The DRIVE Button
Press the DRIVE button to adjust shooting settings. The options
displayed vary with the position of the STILL/MOVIE mode switch.

• Pressing the button when STILL is selected displays drive mode options.

Mode
B Single frame
J High-speed burst
O Low-speed burst
W ISO BKTV WHITE BALANCE BKTBKT Bracketing

P
76
117
117
113
113
114

Mode
j Multiple exposure
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOTq
ACCURATE COLORPIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOTr HIGH RESOLUTION +ACCURATE COLOR

P
119
121
121

• Pressing the button when MOVIE is selected displays movie recording options.

OptionFrame size
Aspect ratio
Frame rate

8

Parts of the Camera

The Command Dials
Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial

Rear command dial1

• Select menu tabs or page
through menus• Adjust aperture• View other pictures during
1, 2

playback

Rotatetion of shutter speed and aperture (program shift)• Choose a shutter speed 1, 4
• Adjust exposure compensation
by rotating the dial while pressing the function button to which
EXPO. COMP. is assigned 1• Adjust settings in the quick menu
• Choose the size of the focus frame• Zoom in or out in full frame playback• Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback• Switch between aperture andISO sensitivity• Zoom in on the active focus point• Press and hold to choose the op- • Press and hold to choose the
2

Press

3

tion selected for D BUTTON/ manual focus mode focus display 3
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND • Zoom in on the active focus
DIAL SETTING in the D (setup) point during playbackmenu

1 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
2 If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the aperture ringmust be in the A or C position.
3 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
4 Only if a value other than auto is selected for shutter speed.

N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.

9

Before You Begin• Highlight menu items• Choose the desired combina-

The Indicator Lamp
Camera status is shown by the indicatorlamp.

1
Before You Begin

Indicator lamp
Glows green
Blinks green
Blinks green andorangeGlows orange
Blinks orange
Blinks red

Camera status
Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for conﬁrmation after being taken with option other than OFF
selected for D SCREEN SETTING > IMAGE DISP. (additional pictures can be taken).
• Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tablet. *Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken at
this time.
Flash charging; ﬂash will not ﬁre when picture is taken.
Lens or memory error.

* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.

N • Warnings may also appear in the display.
• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used tochoose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

10Parts of the Camera

The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for easier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap fingers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.

1“Tall” (Portrait) Orientation
The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when
the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
• Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1.
• To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in
Figure 2.

Figure 1

Figure 2

11

Before You Begin

N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:• Touch photography (P 35)• Focus area selection (P 34)• Function selection (P 37)• Movie optimized control oL (P 36)• Playback (P 38)

The Viewfinder

1
Before You Begin

A Hot shoe .................................................397, 403 G Diopter adjustment control ........................ 15
B Viewﬁnder lock releases ............................... 13 H Serial number plate
C VIEW MODE button......................................... 20 I Connectors ....................................................... 13
D Eye sensor ......................................................... 21 J Hot shoe cover
E Electronic viewﬁnder (EVF) ................... 16, 20 K Connector cover
F Eye cup (lockable) .......................................... 14
The EVF-TL1
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel
the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down
between 0° and 90° (P 397).

12

The Viewfinder

Attaching the Viewfinder
Using the viewfinder makes it easier toframe your subject accurately. Remove
the hot shoe cover from the camera andslide the viewfinder onto the hot shoe,
stopping when it clicks into place.

1
Before You Begin

Removing the Viewfinder
Keeping the lock releases pressed (A), press
down on the front of the viewfinder (B) andslide it off as shown.

13

The Eye Cup
To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.

1
Before You Begin

14

The Viewfinder

Focusing the Viewfinder
If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put youreye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.

O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.

15

1
Before You Begin

To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus.
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.

Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder

1

C

Before You Begin

F

E

F

D

QR

G N O P

UV

ST

Y Z

e f
b

WX

c

d

E
a
2023.12.31
12:10

HI J KLM

D

h
i

G
C
B
A
9

j

k
l
m

8

7
6

5

g

n

zy

v ut

s

r

q po

4
3 21 0 x w

A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 C Movie compression .....................................182
B IS mode 2 .........................................................172 D Focus check ..........................................104, 159

16

Camera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

17

1
Before You Begin

E Depth-of-ﬁeld preview........................ 81, 103 k Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193
F Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 l Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456
G 35mm format mode ...................................172 m Control lock 3 .................................................365
H Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403 n Boost mode ...................................................367
I Flash compensation ...................................403 o Power supply....................................................52
J Self-timer indicator .....................................164 p Histogram .........................................................26
K Continuous mode........................................117 q Battery level ......................................................55
L Shutter type ...................................................170 r Sensitivity .......................................................106
M AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157 s Exposure compensation ............................109t Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
N Bluetooth ON/OFFu Distance indicator 2 .....................................103
O Wireless connection
P Ethernet connection
v Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
Q White balance ..............................................136 w TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
R AWB lock ........................................................362 x AE lock....................................................111, 361
S Film simulation ............................................130 y Metering .........................................................108
T F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 z Shooting mode ...............................................76
U Dynamic range ............................................134 0 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93
V D-range priority ...........................................135 1 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94
W Bluetooth host ..............................................247 2 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101
X AirGlu BT connection ..................................211 3 AF lock....................................................111, 361
Y Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178 4 Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
Z High-speed recording indicator ..............179 5 Time code.......................................................209
a Recording time available/
6 Microphone input channel.......................208
elapsed recording time ..............................68 7 Recording level 2 ...........................................205
b Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 8 Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109
c SSD connection status ..................................49 9 Virtual horizon.................................................27
d Number of available frames 1...................460 A Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110
e Image size ......................................................126 B Location data download status..............373
f File format......................................................182 C Frame.io connection status ......................274
g Image quality................................................127 D Image transfer status ........................247, 313
h HEIF format ...................................................129 E FTP upload progress ...................................278
i Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 F Frame.io upload progress..........................270
j Touch screen mode .............................. 34, 162 G Remote recording function .......................293

The LCD Monitor
E
B C D

G

H

F

M

N

I

JK

O

P

R S

T

A

1

L

U

V

W
Y Z

Q

X

a b

Before You Begin

70
'
'
&

c
d

%
$
\

e
f
g

^
-

h
i
j

9

8
7
6

k
l
m
n
1 0
5 4 3 2xzy

ut s r
w

q

p

o

v

A Movie format/crop factor .........................185 I 35mm format mode ...................................172
B Bluetooth ON/OFF
J Bluetooth host ..............................................247
C Wireless connection
K AirGlu BT connection ..................................211
D Ethernet connection
L Location data download status..............373
E Movie compression .....................................182 M Movie mode ........................................... 68, 178
F Focus check ..........................................104, 159 N High-speed recording indicator ..............179
G Depth-of-ﬁeld preview........................ 81, 103 O Image transfer status ........................247, 313
H Proxy setting (ProRes only)........................184 P FTP upload progress ...................................278

18

Camera Displays

1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORSMODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

19

1
Before You Begin

Q Frame.io upload progress..........................270 r Virtual horizon.................................................27
R Focus frame ............................................ 97, 110 s Exposure compensation ............................109
S Recording time available/t Distance indicator 2 .....................................103
elapsed recording time ..............................68 u Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
T Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 v Shift amount/rotate amount...................396
U Card slot options ................................... 47, 370 w Time code.......................................................209
V SSD connection status ..................................49 x Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
W Number of available frames 1...................460 y TTL lock ..................................................175, 389
X Cooling fan settings ...........................173, 193 z AE lock....................................................111, 361
Y Image size ......................................................126 0 Metering .........................................................108
Z File format......................................................182 1 Shooting mode ...............................................76a Image quality................................................127 2 Focus mode 2 ....................................................93b HEIF format ...................................................129 3 Focus indicator 2 ..............................................94
c Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 34, 162 4 Manual focus indicator 2 .................... 93, 101
d AWB lock ........................................................362 5 AF lock....................................................111, 361
e White balance ..............................................136 6 AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................157
f Film simulation ............................................130 7 Microphone input channel.......................208
g F-Log/HLG recording ..................................186 8 Shutter type ...................................................170h Dynamic range ............................................134 9 Recording level 2 ...........................................205
i D-range priority ...........................................135 A Continuous mode........................................117
j Movie optimized control 3 ............................36 B Self-timer indicator .....................................164
k Temperature warning ......................... 46, 456 C Remote recording function .......................293l Control lock 4 .................................................365 D Frame.io connection status ......................274
m Boost mode ...................................................367 E Exposure indicator................................ 82, 109n Power supply....................................................52 F Flash (TTL) mode .........................................403
o Battery level ......................................................55 G Flash compensation ...................................403
p Histogram .........................................................26 H IS mode 2 .........................................................172
q Sensitivity .......................................................106

Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.

1
Before You Begin

N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu tochoose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.

SHOOTING
OptionDescription
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
E EYE SENSOR
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
EVF ONLY
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on; taking it away turns the viewﬁnder oﬀ. The LCD
EVF ONLY + E
monitor remains oﬀ.
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder during shooting
turns the viewﬁnder on, but the LCD monitor is used forthe display of images once you remove your eye fromE EYE SENSOR + LCD
the viewﬁnder after shooting. The options selected for
IMAGE DISP.
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor. This setting cannot be selected
while shooting movies.

N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING > SHOOTING in
the setup menu and press the Q button to choose the view modes
available.

20Camera Displays

PLAYBACK
OptionE EYE SENSORLCD ONLYEVF ONLY

Description
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder
on and the LCD monitor oﬀ ; taking your eye away turns
the viewﬁnder oﬀ and LCD monitor on.
LCD monitor on, viewﬁnder oﬀ.
Viewﬁnder on, LCD monitor oﬀ.

1
Before You Begin

The Eye Sensor• The eye sensor may respond to objects otherthan your eye or to light shining directly on
the sensor.
• The eye sensor is not available when the LCD
monitor is tilted.
Eye sensor

21

Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.

1
Before You Begin

Display Rotation
When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATEDISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor automatically rotate to match camera orientation.
The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.

N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be selected separately. To choose

the EVF display, place your eye to the viewfinder while using the
DISP/BACK button.

22

Camera Displays

Viewfinder
Full screen

Full screen(no indicators)

1
Before You BeginStandard indicators

Standard (no indicators)

Dual display

N The dual display is available only when shooting still images with manual focus.

23

LCD Monitor
Standard indicators

Standard (no indicators)

Dual display

Info display

1
Before You Begin

N The dual display is available only during manual focus.
The Dual Display
The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and asmaller close-up of the focus area.

24

Camera Displays

Customizing the Standard Display
To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators.

Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.

2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.
3 Choose items.

Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.

• FRAMING GUIDELINE• FOCUS FRAME• FOCUS INDICATOR• AF DISTANCE INDICATOR• MF DISTANCE INDICATOR• HISTOGRAM• LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT• SHOOTING MODE
• APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO• INFORMATION BACKGROUND• Expo. Comp. (Digit)• Expo. Comp. (Scale)• FOCUS MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLASH• CONTINUOUS MODE
• DUAL IS MODE
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE

• WHITE BALANCE• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• BOOST MODE
• SHIFT AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
• ROTATE AMOUNT OF T/S LENS
• COOLING FAN SETTING• FRAMES REMAINING• IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY• MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME
• 35mm FORMAT MODE
• COMMUNICATION STATUS• MIC LEVEL• GUIDANCE MESSAGE• NO STORAGE MEDIA WARNING• DATE/TIME• BATTERY LEVEL• FRAMING OUTLINE

4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes.
5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to theshooting display.

25

1
Before You Begin

Select D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the
setup menu.

Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness isshown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.

1

Number of pixels

Before You Begin

Shadows

Highlights
Pixel brightness• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curvethroughout the tone range.

• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.

• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.

To view separate RGB histograms and a display showing areas of the frame that will beoverexposed at current settings superimposedon the view through the lens, press the function button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned(P 358, 385).

A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms

26

A

B

Camera Displays

Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be chosen using D SCREEN SET-UP > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it ona tripod or the like.
2D
3D

1
Before You Begin

Pitch

Roll

• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.

N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.

27

The Secondary LCD Monitor
Among the settings that can be viewed
in the secondary LCD monitor are shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. Different settings are displayed in still photography and movie modes.

1
Before You Begin

Secondary LCD monitor

Default Settings
By default, the secondary LCD monitor displays the settings listed below.

N The settings displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >SUB MONITOR SETTING.

Still Photography Mode
A

BC
D
E
F
G

K

J
A SHUTTER SPEED
B APERTUREC ISO
D SHOOTING MODEE IMAGE SIZEF WHITE BALANCE

I

H

Default
G FILM SIMULATION
H BATTERY LEVELI FRAMES REM.
J CARD SLOT OPTIONS
K d Scale

N BATTERY LEVEL, FRAMES REM., and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot
be changed in the settings.

28

Camera Displays

Movie Mode
ABC

D
E

M

1

F
K JIH

A SHUTTER SPEED
B APERTURE
C ISO
D MOVIE MODE
E BATTERY LEVELF REMAINING TIME
G TIME CODE

Before You Begin

L

G

Default
H FILM SIMULATIONI WHITE BALANCEJ MOVIE FORMATK SHOOTING MODE
L CARD SLOT OPTIONSM Expo.Comp. & MIC LEVELN MOVIE MODE, BATTERY LEVEL, and CARD SLOT OPTIONS cannot
be changed in the settings.

Checking the functions assigned to function buttons
The functions assigned to the Fn1, Fn2, andFn3 buttons in D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING can be checked on
the secondary LCD monitor.

A

B

C

A Fn1 button
B Fn2 button
C Fn3 button

29

Cycling Through Indicators in the Secondary LCD Monitor
The indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor change each time thesecondary LCD monitor mode button ispressed.

1
Before You Begin

INFORMATION *DIALSHISTOGRAM* Displays movie information in movie mode.

30

Camera Displays

The Secondary Monitor Backlight Button
To turn on the secondary LCD monitor backlight when you find the secondary LCD monitor
too dark to read, press the secondary monitor
backlight button. Press the button again to turnthe backlight off.

31

1
Before You Begin

Background Color
The background color (black or white) for the secondary LCD monitor canbe selected using the D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR BACKGROUNDCOLOR option in the D (setup) menu. Note that the background is displayed in white whenever the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.

Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.

1
Before You Begin

The Menus
Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie
recording, and playback.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT

Shooting

STILL/MOVIE mode switch
set to STILLEXIT

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
SELF-TIMERMEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATIONSTILL/MOVIE mode switch
set to MOVIEEXIT

PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSIONERASEPlayback

SIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECT

During playback

32

EXIT

Using the Menus

Selecting a Menu Tab
To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.
1
Before You Begin

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF

to highlight the tab for the current
menu.

FILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

Tab

3 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the tab containing the desired item.

4 Press the focus stick right to place the cursor in the menu.

N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page throughmenus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.

33

Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.

1
Before You Begin

Shooting Touch Controls
To enable touch controls, select ON for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREENSETTING.

TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGSTOUCH SCREEN SETTINGDOUBLE TAP SETTINGON
TOUCH FUNCTIONTOUCH SCREENOFF
SETTINGEVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS

EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pictures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the monitor employed for touch controls.

N You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferentially focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

34

Touch Screen ModeLCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selectedby tapping the touch screen mode indicator in the display. Touch controls can beused for the following operations:1
Description• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap yourAF

AF OFFsubject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 163).
N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, se-lect OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING >x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH SCREEN MODE; P 203)”.

35

Before You Begin

Mode

1
Before You Begin

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING >MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ortapping the movie-optimized mode button in the shooting display optimizes thecommand dials and touch controls formovie recording. This can be used to prevent camera sounds being recorded withmovie footage.

Movie-optimized
mode button• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION• F ISO• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL• WIND FILTER• HEADPHONES VOLUME• F FILM SIMULATION• F WHITE BALANCE• F IS MODE
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC • F IS MODE BOOSTLEVEL ADJUSTMENTN • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring.

• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized mode

button can be used to change shooting settings or disable movie-optimized control.
• EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT can be set only when an external
mic is connected.

36

Touch Screen Mode

Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the following flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 385):• Flick up: T-Fn1• Flick left: T-Fn2• Flick right: T-Fn3• Flick down: T-Fn4
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
L

tures display a menu; tap to select thedesired option.

R

0
-6
-12
-20

25.5

-40
-50
dB

SET

CANCEL• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable
touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

37

Before You Begin

N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges-1

Touch Screen Mode

Playback Touch Controls
When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
1view other images.

Before You Begin• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.

• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display
and slide them together to zoom out.

N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but nofurther.

• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom inon the focus point.

• Drag: View other areas of the image during
playback zoom.

38

First Steps

39

Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap eyelets as shown below.

2First StepsO To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.

40

Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place thelens on mount, keeping the marks on thelens and camera aligned (A), and thenslowly rotate the lens in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks into place (B).

2

Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, thenpress the lens release button (A) and slowly
rotate the lens as shown (B).

O To prevent dust accumulating on the lensor inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.

Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.

41

First StepsO • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.

Attaching a Lens

O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (exchanging) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright lightsource. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it tomalfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• Do not rotate the lens while holding moving parts of the camera,such as the aperture ring.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.

2
First Steps

42

Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.

1 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Slide the battery-chamber coverlatch as shown and open the battery-chamber cover.

O • Do not open the battery-chamber

cover when the camera is on. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
cards.
• Do not use excessive force whenhandling the battery-chamber cover.

2
First Steps

2 Insert the battery as shown.
O • Insert the battery in the orientation

shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down orbackwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.

43

Inserting the Battery

3 Close the battery-chamber cover.
Close and latch the cover.

O If the cover does not close, check thatthe battery is in the correct orientation. Do not attempt to force the cover shut.

2First Steps

Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover.
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of thecamera as shown.

O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environments. Observe caution when removing the battery.

44

Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).

N The camera is equipped with two memory card slots. Use Slot 1 with
CFexpress cards and Slot 2 with SD, SDHC, or SDXC cards.

1 Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.

2

memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.

2 Insert the memory card.

Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Closeand latch the memory card slot cover.

O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle
or use force.

45

First Steps

O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while theRemoving Memory Cards
Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with afinger and then slowly releasing it; the card canthen be removed by hand.

O • Press the center of the card.
• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly.

2First Steps• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to thetouch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.

46

Inserting Memory Cards

Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the second slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can bechanged using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
OptionBACKUP

Display2First Steps

Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the ﬁrst slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVESEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot andswitch to the ﬁrst slot when the card in the second slot
is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.

RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the ﬁrst
slot and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This setting takes eﬀect only when SUPER RAW+JPEGSEPARATE
FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW, or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGEQUALITY.
RAW+HEIF

The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIESETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

47

2
First Steps

Compatible Memory Cards• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, SDXC, and CFexpress
Type B memory cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces
are supported.
• CFexpress or UHS-II memory cards are recommended for highspeed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording varywith the settings selected (P 72).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.

O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-

ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted fromthe card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a memory card, slide the write-protect switch tothe unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach ofchildren. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the camera to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a computer or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not theoriginals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.

48

Inserting Memory Cards

Using an external SSD in place of a memory card
This camera can save still images andmovies to an SSD. If an SSD is connectedto the USB connector, an icon appears on
the screen, and the recording destinationis switched to the SSD automatically. To
record to a memory card, turn off thecamera, and then remove the SSD.

N Even when an SSD is connected, you can select the SSD or a memory

2First Steps

card for playback by C PLAY BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT.

49

Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.

O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2

1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.

First Steps

Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
place on the AC power adapter terminals.

O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-

sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies withthe country of sale.

2 Charge the battery.

Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.

O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).
• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
50

Charging the Battery

Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp
Battery status
On
Battery charging
Oﬀ
Charging complete
BlinksCharging error

2First Steps

51

O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.

• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe

this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery fromthe camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in product malfunction.
• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge thebattery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may findthat its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.

2First StepsN • If the camera is turned on during charging,charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 328).
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.

52

Charging the Battery

Charging via Computer
The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with computers with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.

2
First Steps

Leave the computer on during charging.
Thebattery
will not charge while the camera is on.
O•• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of computer, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging inputof 5 V/500 mA.

53

Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.

2

O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-

First Stepstures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinderclean.

N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed

for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT >AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.

54

Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in thedisplay.
Battery level is shown as follows:2
Description
Battery partially discharged.
Battery about 80% full.
Battery about 60% full.
Battery about 40% full.
Battery about 20% full.

First Steps

Indicator
e
f
g
h
i
i
(red)
j
(blinks red)Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
Battery exhausted. Turn camera oﬀ and recharge battery.

55

Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you canchoose a language and set the camera clock. Follow thesteps below when turning the camera on for the first time.

1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.

2First Steps

2 Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.

3 Choose a time zone.
When prompted, choose a time zone
and turn daylight savings time on
or off using the focus stick (focus lever), then highlight SET and press
MENU/OK.

AREA SETTINGBERLIN/PARIS

AREA SETTING

GMT ±0:00

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
SET

OFF
NO

N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.

56

Basic Setup

4 Set the clock.
DATE/TIME

GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS

2023 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h

SET

NO

5 View information on the smartphone app.

• The camera will display a QR code

IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERREDTO THE SMARTPHONE.

First Steps

you can scan with your smartphone
to open a website where you candownload the smartphone app.
• Press MENU/OK to proceed to thenext step.

2

APPLICATIONSCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.

SETN Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera
or control the camera remotely (P 247).

6 Choose an AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

• The selected setting determines

the temperature at which the camera will turn off automatically.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shooting display.

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

STANDARDHIGH
SET THE "AUTO POWER OFF TEMP." TO "HIGH" TO EXTEND
THE RECORDING TIME. ONLY RECOMMENDED
WHEN NOT HANDHELD OR WHEN USING TRIPOD ETC.
SET

7 Format the memory card (P 332).

O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.

N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will

be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when thecamera is turned on.

57

Basic Setup

Choosing a Different Language
To change the language:

1 Display language options.

Select D USER SETTING > Qa.

2 Choose a language.

Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

2

Changing the Time and Date
To set the camera clock:First Steps

1 Display DATE/TIME options.

Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.

2 Set the clock.

Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight theyear, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

58

Basic Photography andPlayback

59

Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 76–85 for information on S, A,
and M modes.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

2 Rotate the focus mode selector to S.

3 Rotate the mode dial to P.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release torelease the dial.

4 Confirm that P appears in the display.

60

Taking Photographs (Mode P)

5 Ready the camera.

• Hold the camera steady with both

hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or unsteady hands can blur your shots.

• To prevent pictures that are out offocus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
illuminator.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

6 Frame the picture.

Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.

61

Taking Photographs (Mode P)

7 Focus.

Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.

Focus indicator
Focus frame• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.

• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s3will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.

Basic Photography and Playback

N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light toassist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the button is
kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macroand standard focus ranges for the lens.

8 Shoot.

Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.

62

Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001

N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)

icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playbackzoom may not be available.

Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAYBACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.

63

3
Basic Photography and Playback

Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the focus stick (focus lever) left or right or rotating the front command dial. Pressthe focus stick or rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order
recorded, left to view pictures in reverse order. Keep the focus
stick pressed to scroll rapidly to the desired frame.

HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.
Connecting to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using athird-party HDMI cable.

1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the cable as shown below.
3
Basic Photography and Playback

Insert into
HDMI connector

Insert into HDMI
connector (Type A)

3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the documentation supplied with the device.

4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will

be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 65).

O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.

64

Viewing Pictures

Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an external recorder that supports HDMI input.
Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera monitor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect onsounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls toadjust the volume.

N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie playback begins.

3
Basic Photography and Playback

65Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.

1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button andselect FRAME.

ERASE

FRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

3
Basic Photography and Playback

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll throughpictures and press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is
not displayed). Repeat to delete additional pictures.

N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 228).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACKMENU > ERASE option (P 224).

66

Movie Recording andPlayback

67

Recording Movies
This section describes how to film movies in auto mode.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
MOVIE.

2 Rotate the mode dial to P.

4
Movie Recording and Playback

AUTO will appear in the display.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
the dial.

68

Recording Movies

3 Press the shutter button all the way

down.
Recording will start.
• A recording indicator (V) is displayed while recording is in progress.
• The borders of the display turn Recording time
red during movie recording, green
Time remaining
during high-speed recording.
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.

4 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends
automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.

made by the camera during recording.

• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

69

Movie Recording and Playback

O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds

4N • To maximize recording time:- keep the camera out of direct sunlight as much as possible, and- turn the camera off any time it is not in use.
• The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIESETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording andwhether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
• To prevent the borders of the display changing color during movie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING > F REC FRAME
INDICATOR.
• While recording is in progress, you can:- Adjust sensitivity- Refocus using any of the following methods:• Press the shutter button halfway• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned• Use touch screen controls- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button towhich HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been assigned• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) andrear command dial (P 97).

4
Movie Recording and Playback

70

Recording Movies

Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external microphones that connect using jacks 3.5 mm indiameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.
XLR Microphone Adapters
The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website

4
Movie Recording and Playback

71

Recording Movies

4
Movie Recording and Playback

Adjusting Movie Settings• Pressing MENU/OK when MOVIE is selected with the STILL/MOVIE
mode switch displays the movie menu.
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted using MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
• Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regardless of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
to focus mode C (continuous AF) when FACE DETECTION ON
or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING >g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION
SETTING. Note, however, that choosing focus mode M when
FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selecteddisables face and subject detection.
type of memory card supported varies with the option select forO • TheB MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

- Record ProRes movies to CFexpress cards.
- Movies with a bit rate of 720 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V90 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress cards
or to cards with a Video Speed Class of V60 or better.

- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to CFexpress
cards or to cards with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.

Depth of Field
Choose low f-numbers to soften background details. Aperture can be adjusted when the mode dial is set to A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).

72

Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
Any movie selected after the a button ispressed to begin playback will be indicated by a W icon. Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to start movie playback.

PLAY

AUDIO SET.

+1.0

12800

The following operations can be performed while a movie is displayed:

4

Pause playback

Left/right

Adjust speed

View other pictures

Playback inprogress ((xx)

Playback
paused (y(y)

End playback
Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/advance

Progress is shown in the display during
playback.

STOP

PAUSE

73

Movie Recording and Playback

Focus stick(focus lever) Full-frame playback
View photoUpinformation
Down
Start playback

Viewing Movies

O Do not cover the speaker during playback.
N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Pressthe focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume; press
MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in thecamera monitor, press the a button (P 64).

Playback Speed
Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right toadjust playback speed during playback. Speedis shown by the number of arrows (M or N).

4

ArrowsMovie Recording and Playback

74

29m59sTaking Photographs

75

P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can beselected with program shift.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.

5

2 Rotate the mode dial to P.

Taking Photographs

P will appear in the display.

O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

76

P, S, A, and M Modes

Program ShiftIf desired, you can rotate the front commanddial to select other combinations of shutter
speed and aperture without altering exposure(program shift).

Aperture
Shutter speed

O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >DYNAMIC RANGE• In movie mode

N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.

5
Taking Photographs

77Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to S.

5
Taking Photographs

S will appear in the display.

3 Rotate the rear command dial tochoose the shutter speed.

78

P, S, A, and M ModesO • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter
speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aperture display will show “– – –”.

• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

N • Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.

• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a longtime-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.

5
Taking Photographs

79Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to A.

5
Taking Photographs

A will appear in the display.

3 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N • If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.

• If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperturewhen the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

80

P, S, A, and M ModesO • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,
shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.

• Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release the dial.

N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button displays a L icon and stops aperture down to theselected setting, allowing depth of field to bepreviewed in the display.

5
Taking Photographs

81Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative expression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.

1 Slide the STILL/MOVIE mode switch to
STILL.

2 Rotate the mode dial to M.
5
Taking Photographs

M will appear in the display.

82

P, S, A, and M Modes

3 Rotate the rear command dial tochoose a shutter speed and the lens
aperture ring to choose the aperture.

N • The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicatorthat shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, aperture can be
adjusted using the front command dial on the camera.
• If the lens is equipped with an aperture ring with an “A” or “C” position, the front command dial can be used to adjust aperturewhen the aperture ring is rotated to A or C.
• The roles played by the front command dial can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O Rotate the mode dial only after pressing the dial lock release to release
BULB
Select a shutter speed of BULB for long time-exposures in which
you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the exposure.

1 Set shutter speed to BULB.

83

Taking Photographs

the dial.

52 Press the shutter button all the way down.

• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.

• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.

• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending theexposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.

O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL

IMAGE or multiple exposure or when the electronic shutter is selected
for A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that thismay increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

5
Taking Photographs

84

P, S, A, and M Modes

Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-exposures. When using an optional RR-100 remote release or an electronic release fromthird-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
microphone/remote release connector via athird-party ⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter.

N A confirmation dialog will be displayedwhen a remote release is connected; press
MENU/OK and select n REMOTE for MIC/REMOTE RELEASE.

CHECK MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
SETTING
SKIP
SET

Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.

5

or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the picture is taken.

85

Taking Photographs

N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash

Custom Modes
Rotate the mode dial to any of modes
C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6)
to take pictures using previously-saved
shooting menu settings.

Saving Current Settings
Save current settings in a custom settings bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

5

2 Highlight a destination bank for cur-

Taking Photographs

rent settings (C1 through C6) andpress MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
EXIT

3 Highlight SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
and press MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EXIT

86

P, S, A, and M Modes

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

Current settings will be saved to theselected bank.

SAVE CURRENT SETTINGSCUSTOM 1
SAVE THE CHANGES OK?

OK
CANCEL

Editing Custom Settings
Edit existing custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIESETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

5

CUSTOM 1

CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EXIT

87

Taking Photographs

CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3

4 The camera will display a list of shoot-ing menu items; highlight an item
you wish to edit and press MENU/OK.
Adjust the selected item as desired.

CUSTOM 1

SHOOTING MODE
SHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXP. COMPENSATION
DRIVE MODE

EXIT

5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting
menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.

N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO

UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the changes will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in thelist and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVETHE CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous
settings, select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copiedwith the changes intact.

5
Taking Photographs

Copying Custom Settings
Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting thesettings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been renamed, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N To copy settings for a movie custom settings bank, navigate to
B MOVIE SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

88

P, S, A, and M Modes

2 Highlight the source bank and press

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
EXIT

3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESRESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EXIT

4 Highlight the destination bank (C1

COPY TOCUSTOM 1

through C6) and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5

N Any changes to custom settings in the5

CUSTOM 6

5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

The selected settings will be copied
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings.

Taking Photographs

destination bank will be overwritten.

COPY
CUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?

OKCANCEL89

Resetting Custom Settings
Reset selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N This assumes that you wish to reset settings for still photography.

To reset movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in themovie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
EXIT

3 Highlight RESET CUSTOM SETTING
and press MENU/OK.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

5

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECKSAVE THE CHANGESTaking Photographs

RESET THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EXIT

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
The selected bank will be reset.

RESET CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
RESET CUSTOM SETTING OK?
RESET ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULTOK
CANCEL90

P, S, A, and M Modes

Renaming Custom Settings Banks
Rename selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOMSETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

N This assumes that you wish to rename settings for still photography. To rename movie settings, navigate to B MOVIE SETTING in
the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom settings bank and press MENU/OK.

EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTINGCUSTOM 1
CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CUSTOM 5
CUSTOM 6
EXIT

3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME andpress MENU/OK.

CUSTOM 1
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS
EDIT/CHECK

5SAVE THE CHANGESCOPYRESET CUSTOM SETTING
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
EXIT

4 Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and selectSET.
The selected bank will be renamed.

91

Taking Photographs

RESET THE CHANGESAutofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S
or C (P 93).

2 Use G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE to choose an AF mode
(P 95).
3 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS
AREA and choose the position andsize of the focus frame (P 97).

5
Taking Photographs

4 Take pictures.

92

Autofocus

Focus ModeUse the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.

Choose from the following options:
Mode

S(AF-S)C(AF-C)

M(manual)Description
Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Choose for stationary subjects.
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reﬂect changes in the
distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Use for subjects that are in motion.
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for manualcontrol of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus (P 101).

justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.

93

Taking Photographs

N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-

5

The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.

Focus indicator

5

Focus indicator( )z(lights green)(z)(lights green)A(blinks white)jTaking Photographs

94

Focus status
Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus mode S).
Subject in focus (focus mode C). Focus is automatically adjusted for changes in distance to subject.
Camera unable to focus.
Manual focus (focus mode M).

Autofocus

Autofocus Options (AF Mode)
Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.
3 Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Camera focuses on subject inselected focus point. Use for pinSINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.

r

z
WIDE

j
ALL

Taking Photographs

y
ZONE

5

Camera focuses on subject in selected focus zone. Focus zones include multiple focus points, making it easier to focus on subjects inmotion.

Camera focuses automatically on
high-contrast subjects; display
shows areas in focus.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

95

Focus Mode C (AF-C)
OptionDescription

Sample image

Focus tracks subject at selected focus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.

r

y
ZONE

z

5
Taking Photographs

TRACKING

j
ALL

96

Camera tracks focus in selected focus zone. Use for subjects that are
moving fairly predictably.

Focus tracks subjects moving
through wide area of frame.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection display (P 97, 99) to cycle through the AF modes selected for
G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE ALL SETTING.

Autofocus

Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.
Viewing the Focus-Point Display

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.
2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS AREA to view the focus-point display.

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial tochoose a focus area.

N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 34).

5
Taking Photographs

97Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear commanddial to choose the size of the focus frame.
The procedure varies with the option selected for AF mode.
Focus stick

Rear command dial

AF mode
Tilt

Press

Select focus
point

Select center
focus pointry5
Taking Photographsz

RotatePress

Choose from 6 Restore originalframe sizes
size—

N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
• You can also press the DISP/BACK button to return the focus area to thecenter.

98

Autofocus

The Focus-Point Display
The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.

N • Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by thelarge squares.
• The dimensions of ZONE CUSTOM 1, ZONE CUSTOM 2, and ZONECUSTOM 3 can be selected using G AF/MF SETTING > ZONECUSTOM SETTING.

r SINGLE POINT

AF modey ZONEz WIDE/TRACKING

Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may beunable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).

99

5
Taking Photographs

Number of points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame overable can be selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
G AF/MF SETTING > points or from ZONE
using continuous AF.
NUMBER OF FOCUS CUSTOM 1, ZONEPOINTS.
CUSTOM 2, and ZONECUSTOM 3.

Autofocus

Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear commanddial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rearcommand dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display

5

Focus zoom

N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear commanddial.
• The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in

Taking Photographs

effect.

• In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF
SETTING > PRE-AF is on.

• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING tochange the function performed by the center of the rear commanddial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 385).

100

Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M.

j will appear in the display.

2 Focus manually using the lens focus

5
Taking Photographs

ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce
the focus distance, right to increase.

3 Take pictures.

N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FOCUS RING to reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.

101

Quick Focus• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press

the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size ofthe focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a chosen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs

102

Manual Focus

Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.
The Manual Focus Indicator
The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the focus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance infront of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance(white line)

Depth of field5

are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depthof-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button todisplay standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMATBASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS tohelp you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at highresolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

103

Taking Photographs

N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR

Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK, thecamera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear command dial to exit zoom.

N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITALMICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.

MF Assist
Use G AF/MF SETTING > MF ASSIST (P 158) in the photomenus or G AF/MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST (P 201) in themovie menus to choose a focus check option.

5

N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photography.

Taking Photographs• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image

in the center of the frame. Frame thesubject in the split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four partsof the split image are correctly aligned.

• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern thatemphasizes blur is displayed when thesubject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when thesubject is in focus.

104

Manual Focus• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.

• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below

the focus point indicating whether focus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it isbehind the subject. Adjust focus so theneedle is pointing straight up.

N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > FOCUS RING.

• FOCUS MAP: Square indicators are dis-5

N • You can change the indicator colors to monochrome using G AF/

MF SETTING > F MF ASSIST in the movie menus. With this setting,a white indicator is displayed on a point in front of the focus position, and a black indicator is displayed on a point behind the focus
position.
• Indicators may not be displayed for subjects that are difficult to capture with auto focus (P 99).

105

Taking Photographs

played in focus frames to indicate points
that are in focus and not in focus by color.
A green indicator is displayed on a pointin focus on the subject and a point thesame distance as the subject. A yellow
indicator is displayed on a point in frontof the focus position, and a blue indicator is displayed on a point
behind the focus position.

Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Sensitivity settings can be displayed by pressing the Fn button towhich sensitivity is assigned.
OptionDescription
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shootAUTO1
ing conditions according to combination of standard andAUTO2
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed choAUTO3
sen for A SHOOTING SETTING > ISO. Choose from
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 (P 107).
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in dis80–12800
play.
L (40)
Choose for special situations. Note that mottling may apH (25600/51200/102400) pear in pictures taken at H, while L reduces dynamic range.

5
Taking Photographs

N • Sensitivity is not reset when the camera is turned off.
• If desired, you can use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND

DIAL SETTING to configure the camera so that ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted using the front or rear command dial.

Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

106

Sensitivity

AUTO
Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Item

Options

DEFAULT SENSITIVITY
80–12800
MAX. SENSITIVITY
200–12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ¼–30 SEC, AUTO

AUTO1
800

Default
AUTO2
80
1600
AUTO

AUTO3
3200

The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the default and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above thedefault value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.

N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that

107

5
Taking Photographs

selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set tothe value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTERSPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will automatically adjust the minimum shutter speed according to the focal
length of the lens (the setting remains the same whether image stabilization is on or off ).

Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of thefollowing metering options:

O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.
Mode

o
MULTI

p
CENTERWEIGHTED

5v

Taking Photographs

SPOTw
AVERAGE

Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an
analysis of composition, color, and brightness distribution.
Recommended in most situations.
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
weight to the area at the center.
The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects andin other cases in which the background is much brighter or
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
consistent exposure across multiple shots with the samelighting, and is particularly eﬀective for landscapes andportraits of subjects dressed in black or white.

N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 159).

108

Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Hold the Fn button to which exposure compensation is assigned
and rotate the rear command dial to select the desired value.

N The command dial used in this role can be chosen using D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.
• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:- the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.

109

5
Taking Photographs

Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, thedisplay may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensation during F-Log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected for F DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by
selecting mode M and adjusting exposure directly.

Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

1 Position the subject in the focus

frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button ispressed halfway (AF/AE lock).

2 Press the button all the way down.

N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available

when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.

5
Taking Photographs

110Focus/Exposure Lock

Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At default settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCKONLY, it can similarly be used to lock focus without locking exposure.

AEL button(exposure lock)• While the assigned control is pressed,pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only beended by pressing the control a second
time.

AFON button

5

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposureand focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 387).

111

Taking Photographs

N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
during exposure lock.
• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles usingBracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight oneof the following:

OptionW ISO BKTV WHITE BALANCE BKT

5

P
113
113

Options BracketingP
114

3 Press the focus stick left or right to highlight the desired

Taking Photographs

bracketing settings.

4 Press MENU/OK to select.
5 Take pictures.

112

Bracketing

W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1) in the drive mode
display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera will takea picture at the current sensitivity and process it to create two
additional copies, one with sensitivity raised and the other withsensitivity lowered by the selected amount.
V WHITE BALANCE BKTSelect a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3) in the drive mode display. Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shotand processes it to create three copies: one at the current whitebalanced setting, one with fine-tuning increased by the selectedamount, and another with fine-tuning decreased by the selectedamount.

5
Taking Photographs113

s Bracketing
O AE BKTUse A SHOOTING SETTING > AE BKT SETTING to choose thebracketing amount, bracketing order, and number of shots. The
camera will take the specified number of shots in sequence: one
using the metered value for exposure and the others over- or under-exposed by multiples of the selected bracketing amount.

N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed thelimits of the exposure metering system.

X FILM SIMULATION BKTEach time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot andprocesses it to create copies with different film simulation settings,
chosen using A SHOOTING SETTING > FILM SIMULATION BKT.

5
Taking Photographs

Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes threeshots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.

N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
to a minimum of ISO 320; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored
when bracketing ends.

114

Bracketing

Z FOCUS BKTEach time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series of photos, varying focus with each shot. The A SHOOTINGSETTING > FOCUS BKT SETTING item offers a choice of MANUAL
and AUTO bracketing.

N • Do not adjust zoom during shooting.
• Use of a tripod is recommended.
MANUALIn MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
OptionFRAMESSTEPINTERVAL

Description
Choose the number of shots.
Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
Choose the interval between shots.

Step
Frames 1

2

3

4

5

Starting focus position• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward inﬁnity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to largerchanges.

• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus reaches inﬁnity.

115

5
Taking Photographs

Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and STEP
is shown in the illustration.

Bracketing

AUTO
In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP automatically.

1 Select A SHOOTING SETTING in the shooting menu, highlight FOCUS BKT SETTING, and press MENU/OK.

2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.

The view through the lens will be displayed.

3 Focus on the nearest end of the subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance appears
as A on the focus distance indicator.

FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT B

SETN The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthestend of the subject first.

5
Taking Photographs

4 Focus on the farthest end of the sub-ject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) andfocus range (A to B) appear on thefocus distance indicator.

FOCUS BKT SETTINGSET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RINGSET POINT A

SETN Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK
and select A again.

5 Take photographs.

The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically. The
number of frames will appear in thedisplay.

116

NO

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
drive mode options.

2 If J CH HIGH SPEED BURST or O CL LOW SPEED BURST is
selected, the camera will take pictures continuously while
the shutter-release button is pressed.

Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the
memory card is full.

all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if thespace available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

117

5
Taking Photographs

O • If file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the remaining pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record

Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

Focus and Exposure• Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > SHUTTER AE.

N Depending on such factors as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation, exposure may not be adjusted automatically.

5
Taking Photographs

118

Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select
MULTIPLE EXPOSURE.

2 Choose a blend mode.
ADDITIVE

AVERAGE

BRIGHT

DARK

5

Description
The camera adds the exposures together. You may needto lower exposure compensation depending on thenumber of shots.
The camera automatically optimizes exposure for theﬁnal picture. The background in series shot withoutchanging the composition will be optimally exposed.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.
The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed
depending on their brightness and hue.

3 Take the first shot.

119

Taking Photographs

OptionMultiple Exposures

4 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will beshown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will beprompted to take the second shot.
NEXT
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the first shot, press thefocus stick (focus lever) left.
• To save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple exposure, press DISP/BACK.
5 Take the second shot, using the first
frame as a guide.

EXIT

5

6 Press MENU/OK.

Taking Photographs

The combined exposures will be displayed as a guide to composing thenext shot.
RETRY

EXIT

N • To return to the previous step and retake the second shot, press
the focus stick left.
• To end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.

7 Make additional exposures.

Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.

8 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.

The camera will create the combined image and multiple exposure shooting will end.

120

Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot
The camera takes a series of 4 or 16 shots, using in-body
image stabilization to move the image sensor by half a pixel with each shot and recording each frame in RAW format.
Using specialized computer software, the frames can thenbe combined to create a high-resolution RAW picture.

1 Press the DRIVE button to display
the drive mode options and select PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT
ACCURATE COLOR or PIXEL SHIFTMULTI SHOT HIGH RESOLUTION +ACCURATE COLOR.

2 Choose a value for INTERVAL.

• We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
• If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a val-

3 Press the shutter button to start shooting.

• The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
• To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote release.

4 Combine the shots on a computer.

• The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm, orCapture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by
SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.

121

5
Taking Photographs

ue for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge
between shots.

N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the following computer software:- FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/- Capture One Express for Fujifilm:

https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm- Capture One for Fujifilm:

https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm- Capture One Pro:

https://www.captureone.com/explore-features• Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tetheredshooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.

• The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of 1⁄5 s or
slower (14-bit RAW) or ½.5 s or slower (16-bit RAW).

• The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:- Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using
the electronic shutter.

5- Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher

Taking Photographs

values or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while
lower values remain unchanged.
- The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESSCOMPRESSED.
- Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shotin focus mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual)
selected are shot in the chosen focus mode.
- If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results
may not be achieved when the shots are combined.
- A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set
to OFF.
- The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 4 or 16
shots.

122

Pixel-Shift Multi-Shot

Playback
Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot
option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot
icon in full-frame playback (P 214).

5
Taking Photographs

123

MEMO

124

The Shooting Menus

125

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionO4:3
O3:2
O 16 : 9
O1:1

Image size
11648 × 8736
11648 × 7768
11648 × 6552
8736 × 8736

OptionO 65 : 24
O5:4
O7:6

Image size
11648 × 4304
10928 × 8736
10192 × 8736

Option
P4:3
P3:2
P 16 : 9
P1:1

Image size
8256 × 6192
8256 × 5504
8256 × 4640
6192 × 6192

OptionP 65 : 24
P5:4
P7:6

Image size
8256 × 3048
7744 × 6192
7232 × 6192

OptionQ4:3
Q3:2
Q 16 : 9
Q1:1

Image size
4000 × 3000
4000 × 2664
4000 × 2248
2992 × 2992

Option
Q 65 : 24
Q5:4
Q7:6

Image size
4000 × 1480
3744 × 3000
3504 × 3000

N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or anothershooting mode is selected.

126

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
OptionSUPER FINE
FINE

Description
Very low compression ratios are used for maximum image quality.
Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
SUPER FINE + RAW Record both RAW and super-ﬁne quality JPEG or HEIF images.
Record both RAW and ﬁne-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
Record RAW images only.
RAW
The Function Buttons
To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to afunction button (P 385). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).
Option selected by pressing function
button to which RAW is assigned
SUPER FINE + RAW
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
SUPER FINE
FINE
NORMAL
FINE

127

6The Shooting Menus

Option currently selected for
IMAGE QUALITY
SUPER FINE
FINE
NORMALSUPER FINE + RAW
FINE + RAW
NORMAL + RAW
RAW

RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
RECORDING TYPE
OptionUNCOMPRESSEDLOSSLESSCOMPRESSED6
The Shooting Menus

Description
RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces ﬁle size with no loss of image data. The images can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujiﬁlm 1,
Capture One for Fujiﬁlm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILECONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAWSTUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent (14-bit RAW) or 45 to 100 percent (16-bit RAW) of
their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting ﬁles are anywhere from about 25 to 35 percent (14-bit RAW) or 30 to 40 percent (16-bit RAW) of theiruncompressed size.

1 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://www.captureone.com/
2 For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-poweredby-silkypix/

OUTPUT DEPTH(bit)Option
16bit
14bit

Description
RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 16 bits.
RAW pictures are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits.

O 16bit is available in STILL IMAGE and PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT drive
modes only.

128

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
OptionJPEG
HEIF

Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG format.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent compression but limited options for viewing and sharing.

O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during multiple-exposure photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-

sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the extension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.

6
The Shooting Menus

129

FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including blackand-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette according to your subject and creative intent.
OptionDescriptionc PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects.
d Velvia/VIVID

Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.

e ASTIA/SOFT
i CLASSIC CHROME
c REALA ACE

Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.

g PRO Neg. Hi

Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.

h PRO Neg. Std

Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.

6

g CLASSIC Neg.

The Shooting Menus

n NOSTALGIC Neg.

Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
depth.
Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
photo look.
Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for ﬁlm lookmovie.
Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suitable for still and movie.

X ETERNA/CINEMAN ETERNA BLEACH
BYPASS

130

Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.
Faithful color reproduction with hard tonality suitable forvarious scenes.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Optiona ACROSb MONOCHROME

f SEPIA

Description
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) ﬁlters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
• d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast anddarkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red(R), and green (G) ﬁlters, which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
Shoots in sepia tone.

https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories

131

6
The Shooting Menus

N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness
settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).
• For more information, visit:

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm orcool color cast) to the a ACROS andb MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.
ROUGHNESS
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

6Description
Choose for rougher grains.
Choose for smoother grains.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

SIZE

The Shooting Menus

Option
LARGE
SMALL

132

Description
Choose for coarser grains.
Choose for ﬁner grains.

MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

SETIMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR CHROME EFFECT
Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.

6
Description

The Shooting Menus

OptionSTRONG
WEAK
OFF

Choose for a strong eﬀect.
Choose for a weak eﬀect.
Turn the eﬀect oﬀ.

133

DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of detail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
OptionDescription
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
Reduce loss of detail in highlights.
X 400%O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value
according to the scene.

N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either

V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting conditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800.

6
The Shooting Menus

134

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

D RANGE PRIORITY
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-looking results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
OptionAUTO
STRONG
WEAK
OFF

Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
high-contrast scenes.
Contrast reduction off.

N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO 160 to ISO 12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 320 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to adjust these settings manually, choose OFF.
6
The Shooting Menus

135

WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionWA WHITE
PRIORITYAUTO
AA AMBIENCEPRIORITYk CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2
m CUSTOM 3
k COLORTEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT
j SHADEk FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-1
l FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-2
m FLUORESCENT
LIGHT-3n INCANDESCENT

Description
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiterwhites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
White balance is adjusted automatically.
White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
Measure a value for white balance.
Choose a color temperature.
For subjects in direct sunlight.
For subjects in the shade.
Use under “daylight” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “warm white” ﬂuorescent lights.
Use under “cool white” ﬂuorescent lights.

Use under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwaterg UNDERWATER
lighting.

136

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for

example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance option suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITEPRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 376).

Fine-Tuning White Balance
Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a whitebalance option displays a fine-tuning
dialog; use the focus stick (focus lever) tofine-tune white balance.

WB SHIFTSETN • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after selecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white balance.

6
The Shooting Menus

137

6

Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white
CUSTOM 1
balance for unusual lighting conditions
using a white object as a reference (colored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tarSHUTTER : NEW WBSHIFTNOT CHANGE
get will be displayed; position and size
the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (toselect the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the mostrecent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OKCOMPLETED !
to set white balance to the measured
value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposurecompensation and try again.
SET
CANCEL• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure compensation and try again.

The Shooting Menus

k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the lightsource.

N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “colder” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.

138

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

1 Select k in the white balance menu.

The option currently selected for color temperature will be displayed.

WHITE BALANCECOLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0

SET

2 Edit the color temperature using theSHIFT

COLOR TEMPERATURE

focus stick (focus lever) and press
MENU/OK.
A fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.

SET

SHIFT

N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K byrotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.

3 Highlight a fine-tuning amount using the focus stick.
4 Press MENU/OK.

6

Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature aretinged with blue.

139

The Shooting Menus

The changes will be applied. The selected color temperature will appear
in the display.

TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust theappearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows andhighlights harsher, lower values to makethem softer.
OptionHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWS

TONE CURVEHIGHLIGHTSSHADOWSSET

CANCEL

Description-2 to +4
-2 to +4

COLOR
Adjust color density.
−4

6

−3

−2

−1

The Shooting Menus

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
−4

−3

−2

−1

HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose higher values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values toleave outlines visible.
−4

140

−3

−2

−1

Options
0

+1

+2

+3

+4

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shadows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased definition, lower values for a softer effect.
−5

−4

−3

−2

Options
−1
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases
the time need to save each shot.

LONG EXPOSURE NR
Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
Options
ON

OFF

O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases savetimes.

Options
ON

OFF

COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
OptionsRGB
Adobe RGB

Description
Recommended in most situations.
For commercial printing.

141

6
The Shooting Menus

LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction andthe slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.

xF PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures or movies.

1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING tab.

2 Highlight xF PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pixel mapping.

O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is elevated.

• Processing may take several tens of seconds.

6

x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Save custom camera settings for commonly-encountered situations. Saved settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial topositions C1 (CUSTOM 1) through C6 (CUSTOM 6) (P 86).

The Shooting Menus

AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply automatically.
OptionENABLEDISABLE142

Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
CUSTOM 6 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
settings must be applied manually (P 87).

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 197).
Shutter SelectWhen using lenses with an internal shutter, choose whether to
use the shutter on the camera (BODY) or the lens (LENS).

O This option may have no effect with some lenses.
Saved Settings
Store settings for up to 6 lenses, or choose OFF to disable corrections for focal length, distortion, color shading, and peripheral
illumination.
Choosing a Focal Length
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to enter
the focal length.

LENS 5
INPUT FOCAL LENGTH

6

Distortion Correction
Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or
WEAK options to correct BARREL or
PINCUSHION distortion.

CANCELLENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION

BARREL STRONGBARREL MEDIUMBARREL WEAKOFF
PINCUSHION WEAKPINCUSHION MEDIUMPINCUSHION STRONG

143

The Shooting Menus

SETColor Shading Correction
Color (shading) variations between thecenter and edges of the frame can be adjusted separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow thesteps below.

NEXT

SET

1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The selected corner is indicated by a triangle.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to adjust shading until there isno visible difference in color between the selected corner andthe center of the image.
• Press the focus stick left or right to adjust colors on thecyan–red axis.
• Press the focus stick up or down to adjust colors on theblue–yellow axis.

N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
6

while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

The Shooting Menus

144

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Peripheral Illumination Correction
Choose from values between –5 and+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral illumination. Positive values are recommended for vintage lenses, negative values to create the effect of images takenwith an antique lens or a pinhole camera.

SET

CANCELN To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination correction while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

EDIT LENS NAME
Change the lens name.

6
The Shooting Menus

145

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTING

FOCUS AREA
AF MODE
ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
AF MODE ALL SETTING
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSTORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION

AF POINT DISPLAYyz
xFWRAP FOCUS POINTEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).
AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 95).

6
The Shooting Menus

ZONE CUSTOM SETTING
Create custom focus zones for use when ZONE is selected for AF
MODE.
ZONE CUSTOM 1

OptionZONE CUSTOM 2

ZONE CUSTOM 3

AF MODE ALL SETTING
Choose the focus area to be selected when AF MODE is ALL.
You can match the shooting style and set only the focus area tobe used. This can be set individually for when the focus mode is
S (AF-S) or C (AF-C).
Option
AF-S

146

AF-C

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options.

AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING

AUTO
OK

Option147

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
A standard tracking option that works well withSET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for subSUBJECT
jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switching subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 148, 150).

Focus Tracking Options
The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set aredescribed below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long thecamera waits to switch focus when an
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
the value, the longer the camera will wait.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY

QUICK

LOCKED ON

SETS THE TRACKINGSENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT
ADJUST

0

1

Options
2

3

SWITCH4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

6
The Shooting Menus

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how sensitive the tracking system is to changes insubject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which thesystem attempts to respond to sudden
movement.
0

Options
1

SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY

STEADYACCEL./DECEL.

SETS THE SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT
ADJUST

SWITCH2

O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing

in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.

148

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus
area given priority in zone AF.

ZONE AREA SWITCHING

CENTER AUTOFRONTSETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY
OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA
ADJUST

OptionFRONTAUTO
CENTERSWITCH

Description
Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.

O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.
Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
SPEED TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
0
0
2
1
2

ZONE AREA
SWITCHING
AUTO
CENTER
AUTO
FRONT
AUTO

149

6
The Shooting Menus

SET 1
SET 2
SET 3
SET 4
SET 5

TRACKINGSENSITIVITY
2
3
2
0
3

Custom Focus Tracking Options
Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.

1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS >AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGSSET 6 CUSTOMSET 6 CUSTOM.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITYZONE AREA SWITCHING
ADJUSTAUTO

SET DETAIL

RESET

2 Highlight items using the focus stick (focus lever) and rotate
the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.

3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

6

STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in portrait orientation is stored separately from that used when thecamera is in landscape orientation.

The Shooting Menus

OptionDescription
OFF
The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON
The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

150

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING >AF MODE.
OptionsON

OFF

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the bordersof the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display toanother.
OptionENABLEDISABLE

Description
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of thedisplay to another.
Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.

OptionDescription
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.

151

6
The Shooting Menus

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point selection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.

PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus evenwhen the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.
xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON

6

OFF

The Shooting Menus

O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminatorin some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to thesubject.

• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’seyes.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 200).

152

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
If the camera detects human faces, it willassign them priority over the backgroundand adjust settings appropriately for portraits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when facedetection is on.
OptionO • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may

not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as awhole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON automatically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

153

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential•ON
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferentially on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
OFFIntelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked witha white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will selectone automatically.

• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-

6

sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from oneeye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal orientation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they arehidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 376).

The Shooting Menus

154

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
OptionDescription
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs andcats.
• F BIRD: Camera detects and tracks focus on birds and insects.
G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on•
SUBJECTthe body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
DETECTION ON
for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes and drones.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the drivercompartments or front ends of trains.
OFF
Subject detection oﬀ.
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

155

The Shooting Menus

O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-

6N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.

• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to reposition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be suspended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts(P 376).

6
The Shooting Menus

156

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can beended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus

mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables thefocus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set toinfinity or the minimum focus distance.

N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations
are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist options selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.

157

6
The Shooting Menus

AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus areaby rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rearcommand dial.

MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
OptionDescription
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE
split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts ofthe split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITALis out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).

INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
If ON is selected, the display configured by MF ASSIST appears
only when the focus ring was turned during manual focus mode.
Options

6

ON

The Shooting Menus

158

OFF

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on theselected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual focus mode.
Options
ON

OFF

N • Press the focus stick (focus lever) to cancel focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA
Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
ON

OFF

OptionAF-S
AF-C

Description
The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
The camera focuses while the button is pressed.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).

159

6
The Shooting Menus

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.

xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale.
OptionDescription
Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computersor other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of ﬁeld
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera behaves when the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Settings for AF-S and AF-C focus
modes can be selected separately.
Option6

RELEASEThe Shooting Menus

FOCUS

Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
taken when the camera is in focus.

O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when thecamera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.

160

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
OptionOFF

CUSTOMPRESET1
PRESET2

Description
Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances deﬁned by a minimum andmaximum.
• OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance between them.
Limit focus to a preset range.

O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the minimum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ fromthe actual focus distance.

• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with focus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens.

range.

- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.

• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 202).

161

The Shooting Menus

N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM
is selected:- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus

6

TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode
AF

AF OFF

6

Description
In
focus
mode
S
(AF-S),
thecamera focuses when you tap your•subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

AREA

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
move to the selected point.

OFF

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

The Shooting Menus

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

162

AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
AF
AREA
OFF

Operation performed
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

6
The Shooting Menus

163

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab.

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

SHOOTING SETTING

SELF-TIMERSAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
SELF-TIMER LAMPINTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGINTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODEAE BKT SETTINGFILM SIMULATION BKTEXITSELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF
Self-timer oﬀ.

If an option other than OFF is selected, thetimer will start when the shutter button ispressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.

9O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing infront of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.

164

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING
If ON is selected, the setting chosen for SELF-TIMER will remainin effect after the camera is turned off.
Options
ON

OFF

SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in othersituations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

165

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.

1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab
and press MENU/OK.

2 Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGWITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER

INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMESINTERVALNUMBER OF TIMES

and press MENU/OK.
Interval-timer settings will be displayed.
END

CANCELN If you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
EXTERNAL TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,where you can start interval-timer photography using the remoterelease.

6
The Shooting Menus

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

START WAITING TIME

choose the interval and number ofshots. Press MENU/OK to proceed.

LATER

ESTIMATED START TIME
START

166

PM
CANCELSHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

4 Use the focus stick to choose thestarting time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.

CANCELO Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.
N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-

167

6
The Shooting Menus

val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press thea button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals thenumber of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photography started, set the number of shots to ∞.

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON

OFF

O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVALTIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
AUTO option is selected for ISO.

INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during interval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not longer than the interval between photographs.
Options

6

ON

OFF

The Shooting Menus

O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto).

168

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

AE BKT SETTING
Adjust exposure bracketing settings.
OptionDescription
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequenceand the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing•
FRAMES/STEP SETTING
sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with eachshot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are taken
one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence aretaken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.

FILM SIMULATION BKTChoose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 130).

PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 108).

169

6
The Shooting Menus

FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes(P 115).

SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mutethe shutter sound.
OptionDescriptiont MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
SHUTTERThe camera chooses the mechanical or electronicu MECHANICAL +shutter according to shooting conditions.
ELECTRONIC
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, orr E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
conditions.

If t E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER is selected, t MECHANICALSHUTTER will automatically take effect at high shutter speeds.

O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at highshutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.

6- Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights

The Shooting Menus

or other flickering or erratic illumination.

- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 340), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.

• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposureand loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.

N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 80–12800• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect• The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.

170

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting underfluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
OptionDescription
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the ﬁrst frame only
and the same reduction amount is applied to all subsequent frames that ﬂicker may occur.
Flicker reduction disabled.

ALL FRAMESFIRST FRAMEOFFO • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shutter is used.

• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting and the like.

6

Options
The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF

N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.
ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (P 106).

171

IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
OptionCONTINUOUS
SHOOTING ONLYOFF

Description
Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
Image stabilization oﬀ ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

35mm FORMAT MODE
Enabling A SHOOTING SETTING > 35mm
FORMAT MODE in the shooting menu sets
the picture angle to 35 mm; the change isreflected in the display.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionON
OFF
AUTO

Description
The picture angle is set to 35 mm; the change is reﬂected in thedisplay.
35 mm format mode disabled.
35 mm format mode is enabled automatically when a mountadapter that supports automatic detection is attached.

N • The D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING item in the setup
menu (P 25, 349) includes an option (enabled by default) for displaying a 35mm FORMAT MODE icon.
• The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shooting menu is fixed at O 3 : 2.

172

SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

xF COOLING FAN SETTING
Adjust settings for optional cooling fans (P 416).
Option
AUTO1
AUTO2
LOW
HIGH
OFF

Description
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at slow speed.
The fan turns on automatically as required when camera
temperature rises and runs at high speed. The increased
fan noise may be audible in movies.
Run the fan continuously at low speed.
Run the fan continuously at high speed. The increased fannoise may be audible in movies.
Turn the fan oﬀ.

N For more information, visit:https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

173

6
The Shooting Menus

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK
in the photo shooting display and selectthe F (FLASH SETTING) tab.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTINGEXIT

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode,or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.

MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASHN For more information on flash settings, see“External Flash Units” (P 400) in “Peripherals and Optional Accessories”.

6

ADJUST

RED EYE REMOVAL
Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.

The Shooting Menus

OptionFLASH
OFF

Description
Flash red-eye reduction only.
Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal oﬀ.

N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.

174

END

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photographs.
OptionDescription
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-ﬂashes and locks ﬂash
FLASH
output at the metered value.

N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 385).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if nopreviously metered value exists.

LED LIGHT SETTING
Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if available) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos.
Role of LED video light in still photography
Catchlight
AF-assist illuminator
AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
None

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

175

The Shooting Menus

OptionCATCHLIGHT
AF ASSIST
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT
OFF

6

FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option isavailable when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.
Options
Gr A

Gr B

Gr C

OFF

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options

6

CH1

The Shooting Menus

176

CH2

CH3

CH4

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording,press MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and select the B (MOVIE SETTING)tab.

MOVIE SETTING

MOVIE SETTING LIST
IMAGE FORMAT
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
SELF-TIMERMEDIA REC SETTINGHDMI OUTPUT SETTINGFIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATIONEXIT

MOVIE SETTING LIST
View current movie recording settings.

N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.

IMAGE FORMATYou can change the format of movies to be shot depending on
the lens to be used. Frame size and aspect ratio are set by MOVIE
MODE.
Description
Shoot in the optimal format for GF Series lenses.
Shoot in the optimal format for Premista Series lenses.
Shoot in the optimal format for 35-mm format lenses.
Shoot in the optimal format for anamorphic lenses. You can
ANAMORPHIC(35mm) conﬁgure the lens magniﬁcation or whether to use the desqueeze display when taking pictures.

O • When ANAMORPHIC(35mm) is set, an anti-vibration func-tion operates to match the configured magnification. Do not set
ANAMORPHIC(35mm) when using a lens other than an anamorphic
lens.
• When B MOVIE SETTING > HDMI OUTPUT SETTING > HDMIOUTPUT INFO DISPLAY is set to OFF, HDMI output does not use
the desqueeze display, even when desqueeze display is set to ON for
ANAMORPHIC(35mm).

177

6The Shooting Menus

OptionGF
Premista
35mm

MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose theframe rate and the frame size and aspectratio.

MOVIE MODE

END

CANCEL1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then highlight MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight thedesired frame size and aspect ratio (A) and press the stickright.
The setting values that can be selected depend on the IMAGE
FORMAT setting.

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight a
6frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.

The Shooting Menus

23.98P

24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.

178

59.94PMOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HIGH SPEED REC
Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can beplayed back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON tochoose the recording and playback rates separately.

N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders

connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.

Frame Size
Options
W16 : 9W17 : 9Recording
Options
100P

120P

6

Playback
24P

25P

Options
29.97P

50P

59.94PN • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.
• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with thegoal of maintaining the selected bit rate.

• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.

179

The Shooting Menus

23.98P

F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
• The display shows the number of seconds remaining before recording begins.
• To stop the timer before recording begins, press DISP/BACK.
Options
3 SEC

6The Shooting Menus

180

5 SEC

10 SECOFFMOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, bitrate, and proxy video.
MEDIA REC SETTING
Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, andcompression.
Destination
Choose save options and save and output destinations for movies.
OptionP
Q
R
TY

O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.

181

6
The Shooting Menus

U

Description
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Movies are recorded only to the memory card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the cardﬁlls. Any additional footage will then automatically be recorded to the card in Slot 2.
Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
Movies are recorded only to an SSD connected to the USB connector.
Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.

File Type and Compression
Choose the movie file type and compression.
OptionH.264 ALL-I 420 MOV

H.264 LongGOP 420 MOV

H.264 LongGOP 420 MP4

H.265 ALL-I 420 MOV

H.265 LongGOP 420 MOV

6The Shooting Menus

H.265 ALL-I 422 MOV

H.265 LongGOP 422 MOV
ProRes HQ MOV *ProRes 422 MOV *ProRes LT MOV *Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage isrecorded at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage isrecorded at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded
to the web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 0chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma
sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than
H.264. Footage is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP interframe compression and 4 : 2 : 2chroma sub-sampling.
Record movies in ProRes 422 HQ format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 format.
Record movies in ProRes 422 LT format.

* Available only when P is selected as the destination.

182

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)N • The ProRes format is intended for the footage will be edited on acomputer or the like.
• 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external

devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the factthat the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Filesare smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the options selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.

Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
50Mbps100Mbps

Options
200Mbps360Mbps

720MbpsN • The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for

183

6
The Shooting Menus

high-speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate
may be slower than the selected value depending on the subject.
• The bit rate for ProRes movies is set automatically according to the format chosen and the frame size and rate. For more information, visit theApple website.

PROXY SETTING (ONLY WHEN REC ProRes)
Choose whether the camera simultaneously records a duplicate“proxy” video with movies shot in ProRes format.
OptionDescription
ON (H.264)
Record proxy videos in H.264 format.
ON (ProRes Proxy) Record proxy videos in ProRes Proxy format.
OFF
Proxy recording disabled.

O • Proxy recording is not available at a frame size of 8K if the frame rateis either 29.97P or 25P.
• Deleting the original footage from the camera also deletes the proxy
video. The original and proxy videos cannot be deleted separately.

• When deleting movies from camera memory cards using a computer,be sure to delete both the originals and the proxies.

HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.

6
The Shooting Menus

HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY
If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON

OFF

HDMI REC CONTROL
Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to startand stop movie recording.
Options
ON

184

OFF

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

RAW OUTPUT SETTING
Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
OptionDescription
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOSRAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING BlackmagicOFF
Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.

N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 8K.
• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.

• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 640 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original

FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
Fix the movie crop ratio according to the IMAGE FORMAT setting. This makes it easier to match crops after changing movie
settings.
Options
ON

OFF

185

6
The Shooting Menus

RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-productionor the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output.
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not display correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.
• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.

F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
OptionDescription
The footage is processed using ﬁlm simulation and bothcPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output toc HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.

N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-

6
The Shooting Menus

able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted tovalues between ISO 400 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 800
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the international ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 640 and ISO 12800.
• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selectedfor H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > F FILM SIMULATION in theshooting menu.

186

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

DATA LEVEL SETTING
Choose a signal range for movie recording.
OptionVIDEO RANGEFULL RANGE

Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and thatfor 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
0–255 and 0–1023.

F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 108).
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 171).
Options
ON

OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

187

F IS MODE
Choose the image stabilization mode.
OptionIBIS/OISIBIS/OIS + DIS
OFFDescription
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE. This setting can compensate
for more severe camera shake.
Image stabilization oﬀ ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
OptionON
OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Suitable for shots with no panning.
Suitable for shots with panning.

N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image stabilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 385).

188

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F ISO
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
OptionDescription
Choose for special situations. Note that dynamic range may
be reduced and that pictures may be mottled.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown indisplay.
The ISO sensitivity (ISO 100 to ISO 12800) for the brightnessof the subject is set automatically.

H (25600)
100–12800
AUTO

ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
OptionZEBRA RIGHT

Right-slanting stripes.

Description

ZEBRA LEFT
OFF

Left-slanting stripes.
Stripes oﬀ.

6

50

55

60

65

70

Options
75
80

85

90

95

100

189

The Shooting Menus

ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.

WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Choose whether to display chrominance and luminance signals
during movie recording. The position and size can be changed
using the focus stick (focus lever) and command dials.
Options
WAVEFORM

PARADEVECTORSCOPEWAVEFORM
A waveform is displayed.

6

PARADEAn RGB parade is displayed. You canchange the display method for colors byturning the front command dial.

OFF

WAVEFORM SETTINGThe Shooting Menus

SWITCH DISP.

COLORSWITCH DISP.

PARADE SETTING

SET

190

SET

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

VECTORSCOPE
A vectorscope is displayed.

VECTORSCOPE SETTINGSETSWITCH DISP.

OFF
Neither a waveform monitor, a parade, nor a vectorscope is displayed.
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only thecommand dials and touch-screen controls. You may find thishelpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being recorded with movies (P 36).
OptionsON

6

OFF

Options
ON

OFF

N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie recording.

191

The Shooting Menus

F REC FRAME INDICATOR
If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.

TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

Indicator lamp

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionFRONT OFFREAR zFRONT OFFREAR yFRONT zREAR zFRONT zREAR OFFFRONT yREAR yFRONT yREAR OFFFRONT OFFREAR OFF

192

AF-assist illuminator
Description

The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain oﬀ during movie recording.

MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)xF COOLING FAN SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 86).
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONThis item is also found in the photo menus (P 173).

6
The Shooting Menus

193

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display andselect the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING)
tab.

IMAGE QUALITY SETTINGFFILM SIMULATIONFMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FDYNAMIC RANGE
FWHITE BALANCEFTONE CURVEFCOLORFSHARPNESSFHIGH ISO NR
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 130).

6F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 132).

The Shooting Menus

194

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option
V100%
W200%
X400%

Description
See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 134).

N • AUTO (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during
movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 200 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 400 to 12800.

• This item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIESETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.

F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 136).

F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).

195

6
The Shooting Menus

F TONE CURVE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).

F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).
F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 140).
INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO

OFF

N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting.

6

xF PIXEL MAPPINGThis item is also found in the photo menus (P 142).

The Shooting Menus

196

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F-Log2 D RANGE PRIORITY
Choose whether to make the dynamic range wider when shooting F-Log2 movies with IMAGE FORMAT set to GF or Premista,
image size set to d or V, and a frame rate of 30 fps or less.
The rolling shutter effect may occur when this setting is enabled.
OptionsON

OFF

F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION
Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
OptionsON

OFF

N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the cameraxF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 143). Changes to
one apply to the other.

197

6
The Shooting Menus

is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to theoption selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > xF MOUNTADAPTOR SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 145).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this option.

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe G (AF/MF SETTING) tab.

AF/MF SETTINGFFOCUS AREA
FAF MODEFAF-C CUSTOM SETTINGxFWRAP FOCUS POINT
xFAF ILLUMINATORFgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGFSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MFEXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.
F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 97).

O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
6

F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.

The Shooting Menus

Option
MULTI
WIDE/TRACKING
AREA

198

Description
The camera selects the focus area automatically.
The camera tracks the subject automatically if the focus stick(focus lever) is pushed to the center or the screen is touchedwhen the focus mode is C. The camera selects the focus
subject automatically when the focus mode is S.
The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an object enters the focus area behind or in front of the current subject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 148).
01

Options
2

3

4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values forfaster response times, lower values for slower response times.
−4

−3

−2

+2

+3

+4

+5

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 151). Changes to
one apply to the other.

199

6
The Shooting Menus−5

Options−1
0+1

xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 152). Changes to
one apply to the other.
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
OptionFACE DETECTION ON
OFF

Description
See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 153).
Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority oﬀ.

O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus using continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.

6

F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 155).

The Shooting Menus

O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.

200

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
ON

OFF

F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 104).
OptionDescription
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
FOCUS METER
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
HIGHLIGHT
Indicators for locations in and out of focus are displayed
FOCUS MAP
on the screen.
OFF
Focus is displayed normally (MF assist cannot be used).

201

6
The Shooting Menus

F INTERLOCK MF ASSIST & FOCUS RING
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 158).

F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settingsmust be adjusted separately (P 159).
xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 160). Changes to
one apply to the other.
xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 161). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

202

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode

AF

AREA

Touch screen mode oﬀ.

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.
• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indicator, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH SCREENSETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

203

6
The Shooting Menus

OFF

Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap thedisplay before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to position the focus point.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to startand stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point selected by tapping the display.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to position the focus area over your subject.

AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)Touch Controls for Focus Zoom
Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs theoperations below.

Mode
AF
AREA
OFF

6

Operation performed
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S/MF: OFF

The Shooting Menus

Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,whether during still photography or movie recording and regardless of the option selected
for touch screen mode.

FOCUS CHECK LOCK
Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie recording begins.
Options
ON

204

OFF

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK
in the movie shooting display and selectthe P (AUDIO SETTING) tab.

AUDIO SETTING

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENTMIC JACK SETTINGMIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTERLOW CUT FILTERHEADPHONES VOLUME
MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
EXIT

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
OptionAUTO
MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Turn the built-in microphone oﬀ.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the recording level for external microphones.

MANUALOFF

Description
The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recordinglevels.
Disable recording using external microphones.

205

The Shooting Menus

OptionAUTO

6

MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
OptionMIC
LINE

Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external microphone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER
Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON

OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.

6

Options

The Shooting Menus

ON

206

OFF

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-frequency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON

OFF

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option0
1—10

Description
Mute output to the headphones.
Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

MIC/REMOTE RELEASE
Specify whether the device connected to the microphone/remote release connector is a microphone or a remote release.
Optionsm MIC

n REMOTE

6
The Shooting Menus

207

AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option6
The Shooting Menus

Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with thehelp of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound withthe help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones orother audio monitors during movie recording.
XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con•
4ch AUDIO MONITORING
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in microphone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
HDMI 4ch AUDIO
the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI conOUTPUT
nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an XLR microphone adapter will be used, remove the viewfinder.
• If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected formovie file format.

208

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame number) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING)
tab.

TIME CODE SETTINGTIME CODE DISPLAY
START TIME SETTING
COUNT UP SETTINGDROP FRAME
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
TIME CODE SYNC. SETTINGEXIT

TIME CODE DISPLAY
Select ON to display time codes during movie recording andplayback.
Options
ON

OFF

START TIME SETTING
Choose the time code starting time.

6
The Shooting Menus

OptionDescription
MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.
CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET
Set the start time to 00:00:00.

209

COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
OptionREC RUN
FREE RUN

Description
Time is clocked only during movie recording.
Time is clocked continuously.

DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradually develop between the time code (measured in seconds) andthe actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to matchthe recording time to the time code.
OptionON
OFF

6Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
Frames are not dropped.

N • The time code display varies with the option selected.

The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF

• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.

210

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT
Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON

OFF

TIME CODE SYNC. SETTING
Choose whether to synchronize time codes with an external device.
CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT
If ON is selected, the camera connects with paired external devices and synchronizes time codes. Because simultaneous connection with a smartphone is not possible, the smartphone icon
is displayed in the yellow on the screen.
Options
ON

OFF

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the ATOMOS AirGlu BT and camera.

6
The Shooting Menus• If the camera connects with the ATOMOSAirGlu BT, an icon appears on the screen.

• The pairing with the ATOMOS AirGlu BT can be ended using

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
in the network/USB setting menu.

211

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)Time code synchronization state
You can check the time code synchronization
state by the icons displayed on the EVF or LCD.

Icon
(white)(white)(amber)

6
The Shooting Menus

(red)

212

Synchronization state
The time code synchronization function is not
being used.
Time codes are being synchronized.
External devices have been disconnected or timecodes are not being synchronized. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the cameracontinues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value isdisplayed.
Time codes are not being synchronized because
the frame rate settings are diﬀerent. If time codes
have been synchronized once, and the cameracontinues to count internally after CONNECT TO
ATOMOS AirGlu BT was set to ON, a value isdisplayed.

Playback and the Playback
Menu

213

The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.

O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A

B

C D E

F

G

H

I

12/31/2023
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

n
m
l
k

J
K
L
M
N

j
i
h
g
f
e
O
d
c

214

b

a

Z

Y

X

W V U

TS R Q P

The Playback Display

215

Playback and the Playback Menu

A Date and time..................................56, 58, 333 U Film simulation ............................................130
B Frame-number display
V Dynamic range ............................................134
C Image transfer order
W White balance ..............................................136
D FTP image transfer order
X Sensitivity .......................................................171
E Frame.io image transfer order
Y Exposure compensation ............................109
F Image transfer status
Z Aperture...............................................77, 80, 82
G FTP upload progressa Time code.......................................................209
H Frame.io upload progressb Shutter speed .....................................77, 78, 82
I Frame number..............................................369 c Playback mode indicator .............................63
J SSD connection status ..................................49 d Movie icon ........................................................73
K Card slot..........................................................220 e Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio ... 208
L Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................121 f Bluetooth host ..............................................247
M Protected image ...........................................228 g Photobook assist indicator .......................236
N Location data................................................373 h Bluetooth ON/OFFO Low battery ......................................................55 i DPOF print indicator ...................................238
P Image quality................................................127 j Frame.io connection status ......................274
Q Movie mode ..................................................178 k Voice memo ..................................................230
R HEIF ..................................................................129 l Gift image .........................................................63
S Image size ......................................................126 m Rating..............................................................231
T Film format ....................................................182 n Face detection indicator ............................153

7

The DISP/BACK Button
The DISP/BACK button controls the displayof indicators during playback.

Standard
12/31/2023

Information off

1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

12/31/2023

1/999

NEXT

7

Info display

216

The Playback Display

Viewing Photo Information
The photo information display changes eachtime the focus stick (focus lever) is pressed up.

Basic data
12/31/2023

Info display 1

1/999

12/31/2023

1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

NEXT

12/31/2022

1/1000S.S 1/1000

F 5.6

ISO 12800

5.6

12800

+1.0
BACK

Info display 3

+1.0

NEXT

7

Info display 2

Zooming in on the Focus Point
Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.

217

Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom andmulti-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from full-frame playback to
playback zoom or multi-frame playback. Rotate the rear command dial to right or left, the display changes as shown. The display changes in reverse order when rotate the dial to opposite
direction.
Playback and the Playback Menu

N To cancel playback zoom or multi-frame playback, press DISP/BACK or
MENU/OK.

Maximum zoom

Medium zoom
Playback zoom

7

Full-frame playback
Multi-frame playback

Nine-frame view218

Hundred- frame view

Viewing Pictures

Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.

N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGEQUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.

ScrollWhen the picture is zoomed in, the focus stick(focus lever) can be used to view areas of theimage not currently visible in the display.

Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear command dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.

N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to highlight images and press MENU/OK
to view the highlighted image full frame.
• In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the focus stick up or
down to view more pictures.

219

Playback and the Playback Menu

Navigation window

7

The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when
you press MENU/OK in playback mode.

PLAY BACK MENUSWITCH SLOTRAW CONVERSIONHEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSIONERASESIMULTANEOUS DELETECROPRESIZEPROTECT
EXIT

Playback and the Playback Menu

SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card or SSD from which images will be played back.

N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button during playback to choose a card for playback.

7

220

The Playback Menu

RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera tomodify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.
Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format

1 Display a RAW picture.
2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3 Press MENU/OK.
RAW CONVERSION

A list of settings will be displayed.

CREATECANCEL4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to highlight asetting.
5 Press the focus stick right to display
options.

RAW CONVERSION
100%
200%
400%

Playback and the Playback Menu

REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
FILE TYPEIMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSINGDYNAMIC RANGE

7

6 Press the focus stick up or down to highlight the desired option.
7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 toadjust additional settings.

8 Press the Q button.

A preview of the copy will be displayed.

9 Press MENU/OK.

The copy will be saved.

N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q button when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.

221

The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures fromRAW to another format are:Setting

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

Description
Create a copy using the settings in eﬀect at the time
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
the photo was taken.
FILE TYPE
Choose a ﬁle format.
IMAGE SIZE
Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY
Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE
Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows
D RANGE PRIORITY
for natural-looking results when photographinghigh-contrast scenes.
FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the eﬀects of diﬀerent types of ﬁlm.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs takMONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION > a ACROS andb MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT
Add a ﬁlm grain eﬀect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
colors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds,
yellows, and greens.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT
Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE
Adjust white balance.
WB SHIFT
Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE
Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR
Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines.
HIGH ISO NR
Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY
Increase deﬁnition.
Improve deﬁnition by adjusting for diﬀraction and
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE
Choose the color space used for color reproduction.

O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosenwhen the picture was taken.

222

The Playback Menu

HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.
SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.
FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
TIFF 16bit

SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the destination to which the converted pictures will besaved.
SSD

Options
SLOT 1

SLOT 2

Playback and the Playback Menu

JPEG

Options
TIFF 8bit

7223

ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pictures.

O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures orcopy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
OptionFRAME
SELECTED FRAMESALL FRAMES

Description
Delete pictures one at a time.
Delete multiple selected pictures.
Delete all unprotected pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to scroll throughpictures and press MENU/OK to delete.

N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; besure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press the focus stick left or right to scroll through pictures and press MENU/OK todelete.

7

224

The Playback Menu

SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.

• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.

3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display aconfirmation dialog.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.

N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.

225

Playback and the Playback Menu

tures.

7

SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATASET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
OptionON
OFF
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.

CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select CROP in the playback menu.
3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press thefocus stick (focus lever) up, down, left, or right to scroll the
picture until the desired portion is displayed.

4 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.
5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate
file.

N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in thecropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.

226

The Playback Menu

RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.
2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu.
3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation
dialog.

4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate
file.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.

7

227

PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of thefollowing options and press MENU/OK.
OptionFRAME
SET ALLRESET ALL

Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to view pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Press DISP/BACK when the operation is complete.
Protect all pictures.
Remove protection from all pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.
N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smartphones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON button during playback.

7

228

The Playback Menu

IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.

1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.
2 Display the desired picture.
3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.
4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) down to rotate the picture
90° clockwise, up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.

the selected orientation whenever it is played back on thecamera.

N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before rotating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with otherdevices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated whenviewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are automatically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.

Playback and the Playback Menu

5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in

7229

VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.

1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.
2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.
3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-cord the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you release the dial.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front command dial.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and thenpressing the focus stick (focus lever) up or down to adjust the volume.
Press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.

7230

The Playback Menu

RATING
Rate pictures using stars.

1 Select RATING in the playback menu.
2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and therear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars(“I”).

single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.

• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:- Protected pictures- Movies- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • The focus stick (focus lever) can be used in place of the front command dial to choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in

7

231

COPY
Copy pictures between a card in the first slot, a card in the second slot, and an SSD connected to the USB connector.

1 Select COPY in the playback menu.
2 Highlight one of the following options.

Playback and the Playback Menu

OptionDescription
SSD y SLOT1 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the ﬁrst slot.
SSD y SLOT2 Copy pictures from the SSD to the card in the second slot.
SLOT1 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the ﬁrst slot to the SSD.
Copy pictures from the card in the ﬁrst slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
SLOT2 y SSD Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the SSD.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the ﬁrst slot.

3 Press the focus stick (focus lever) right.
4 Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.
OptionFRAME

7ALL FRAMES

Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the focus stick left or right toview pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current picture.
Copy all pictures.

O • Copying ends when the destination is full.
• If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card witha capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.

232

The Playback Menu

TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE
Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth.

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &TRANSFER.

N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.

2 Mark pictures for upload.

3 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.

FRAME

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTING

Playback and the Playback Menu

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in theother slot or display only picturesthat meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

SELECT IMAGE

7SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER

233

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a SlotTo switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
teria, choose FILTERING.
START TRANSFERFILTERING• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONSO Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upPlayback and the Playback Menu

7

load marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:- Protected pictures- Movies- RAW images- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, thepicture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

234

The Playback Menu

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:• Control the camera and take pictures remotely• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pictures• Upload location data to the camera

DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to thesmartphone using the Fn1 button.

DESQUEEZE DISP. IN PLAYBACKIf ON is selected, movies taken when B MOVIE SETTING > IMAGE
FORMAT is set to ANAMORPHIC(35mm) are played back at themagnification specified when taken.
Options
ON

OFF

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • For downloads and other information, visit:https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/

7235

PHOTOBOOK ASSISTCreate books from your favorite photos.
Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOKASSIST.

2 Scroll through the images and press the focus stick (focus le-ver) up to select or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when thebook is complete.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the focus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.

3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The newbook will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.

N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.

7236

The Playback Menu

Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the focus stick (focus lever) left or
right to scroll through the pictures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

Editing and Deleting Photobooks
Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the onscreen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.

7237

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.

1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).
2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.

3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the
Playback and the Playback Menu

7

print order.

4 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

or down to choose the number ofcopies (up to 99).

N To remove a picture from the order,press the focus stick down until thenumber of copies is 0.

PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
DPOF: 00001

01 SHEETS
FRAME

SET

Total numberof prints
Number of copies

N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.

N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.

• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.

238

The Playback Menu

instax PRINTER PRINT
To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.

1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.

PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTINGCANCEL

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) todisplay the picture you want to print,then press MENU/OK. The picture will
be sent to the printer and printing
will start.

PRINTER PRINT
100-0020

SET
instax-12345678

CANCELN • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.

239

Playback and the Playback Menu

FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

7

The Playback Menu

DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).

Options
Playback and the Playback Menu

16 : 94:3

N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 4 : 3 full screen.
The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.

7

240

Network/USB Setting Menus

241

Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera andtake pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.
Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
Features that can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
Description
P
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
Connecting to the
pictures or control the camera remotely while the 247
smartphone app
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone
USB card readers
252
via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
Web camera257
as a webcam.
instax printers
Print pictures on connected instax printers.
258
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography
260
is connected (“tethered”) via a USB cable.
Harness the power of the camera’s image
RAW processing
processing engine when processing RAW pictures 291
on a computer.
Saving and Loading Save camera settings to, or load existing from, a292
Settings
computer.
FeatureNetwork/USB Setting Menus

8

These features can be accessed via SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

242

Overview

Features that can be accessed if set by CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING
Description
P
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography
260
is connected (“tethered”) via wireless or wired LAN.
Upload to FTP servers Upload ﬁles to FTP servers.
278
Remote movie
Control the camera and take pictures remotely using
293
recordinga web browser on a computer or tablet.
FeatureThese features can be accessed by selecting a connection setting
profile to which the desired settings and connection type havebeen saved using CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING.
Features that can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting menu
Description
Upload ﬁles to Frame.io.

P
270

These features can be accessed if set by the network/USB setting
menu.

Network/USB Setting Menus

FeatureUpload to Frame.io

8243

Camera indicator lamp display
The camera indicator lamp shows thestatus of its connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like.

Indicator lamp
Blinks red
Glows red
Blinks orange
Network/USB Setting Menus

Blinks orange and red
Blinks green
Blinks green and red

8244

Connection status
No network connection.
No network connection; pictures awaiting upload.
Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server;
pictures awaiting upload.
Ready for tethered photography, upload to Frame.io,
or FTP upload.
Ready for tethered photography, upload toFrame.io, or FTP upload; pictures awaiting upload.

Overview

The EVF/LCD Displays
The status of the connection to computers,
Frame.io, FTP servers, and the like is also shownby an icon in the electronic viewfinder or LCD
monitor.

Icon

Connection status
No network connection.
Connected to network but not to computer tethered photography software, Frame.io, or FTP server.
Ready for tethered photography, FTP upload, or
upload to Frame.io.
Network/USB Setting Menus

8245

Overview

Connection Setting Profiles
Connection setting profiles contain information on both network
settings and the type of connection used. You can connect tocomputers and smartphones by selecting the associated profile.
Selecting a Connection Setting Profile
To select a connection setting profile, press MENU/OK and choose SELECTCONNECTION SETTING in the I (network/USB setting) tab.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMNOT CREATEDNOT CREATED

N For tethered photography via wireless LAN, you will first need to create
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

and save a new connection setting profile by following the instructions of a wizard displayed by selecting CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING.

Saving Connection Setting Profiles
To create a connection setting profile containing information on
network/USB settings and the type of connection used, selectCREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
Choose CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION
SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD, select the desired network/USB settings,
and save the resulting profile (P 313).

CREATE USING WIZARDSMARTPHONE APP
USB CARD READER
WEBCAM
PRINTER PRINTTETHER SHOOTINGCONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP

246

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® tocopy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera remotely while previewing the view through the lens in thesmartphone display.

N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.

Installing Smartphone Apps
Before establishing a connection between the smartphone andcamera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smartphone app. Visit the following website and install the desiredapps on your phone.

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.

Network/USB Setting Menus

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

8

1 Press DISP/BACK while shooting information is displayed.

N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the DISP/BACK
button during playback.

247

2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK.

Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING

BluetoothBluetooth3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK.

Bluetooth

PAIRING
Bluetooth ON/OFF

4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the camera and smartphone will automatically connect via Bluetooth. A smartphone icon and a white Bluetoothicon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.

N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automatically connect to the camera when the app is launched.
• Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smartphone reduces the drain on the battery.

248

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)

Using the Smartphone App
Before launching the smartphone app, choose 1: UNIVERSALSETTING for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.

N Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONESETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF.

Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App
You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using thesmartphone app.

N More information is available from the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > RESIZEIMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu enables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 322).
• Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.

249

Network/USB Setting Menus

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONESETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired device.

8

Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu
Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE &TRANSFER to select pictures for upload to a paired smartphoneor tablet via Bluetooth®.

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT IMAGE& TRANSFER.

N Select RESET ORDER to remove “upload to smartphone” marking
from all pictures before proceeding.

Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Mark pictures for upload.

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in theother slot or display only picturesthat meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

8

3 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded.

250

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTINGSELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER

Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a SlotTo switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.

• To display only pictures that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING.
• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONSO Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking.

and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device willcontinue even while the camera is off.
• When d SELECT & SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, thepicture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

251

Network/USB Setting Menus

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.
• The following cannot be selected for upload:- Protected pictures- Movies- RAW images- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF

8

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone
Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB settingmenu.
For Customers Using Android Devices
How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
connector with which your smartphone is equipped.
Network/USB Setting Menus

Type-CUse the supplied USB cable.
Supplied USB cable

Type-C connector (male)

8252

Type-C connector (male)Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Micro-B
Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable.
Third-party USB cable

Type-C connector (male)
Type-A connector(male)USB OTG cable

Micro-B connector (male)
Type-A connector(female)Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and moveon to the next step.

4 On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB
PTP”.

5 From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.

The app will automatically start and allow you to import photos and movies to your smartphone.

N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on theapp, please try again from step 3.

253

Network/USB Setting Menus

O • The smartphone must support USB OTG.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–8

For Customers Using iOS
Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a
USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB
Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter.
Third-party USB cable

Type-C connector (male)Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter

Use an Apple Lightning to
USB Camera Adapter

Type-A connector (male)
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER
SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to yoursmartphone.

O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad andother devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter.

254

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Connecting the Camera and Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 2: USB CARD READER for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

3 Turn the camera off.
4 Turn the computer on.
5 Connect a USB cable.

O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and besuitable for data transfer.

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB connector (Type-C)

86 Turn the camera on.
7 Copy pictures to your computer.

• Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer

using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or other software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size.
• Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.

255

Connecting to Smartphones (USB)O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable.
• When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to thecomputer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
• Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage tothe memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before connecting the camera.
• If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be unable to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
• Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning
the camera off.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage tothe memory card.
• Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
• In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a standalone computer.
• Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or disconnect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is inprogress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message hasceased to be displayed.
• The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company orInternet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.

256

Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 6: USB WEBCAM for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 255).

4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a webcam.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8257

instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.
Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) andpassword.

Network/USB Setting Menus

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on thebottom of the printer; the default password is“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.

8258

instax SHARE Printers

Printing Pictures
1 Choose 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

2 Turn the printer on.
3 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will connect to the printer.

PRINTER PRINT
instax-12345678
CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

CANCELPRINTER PRINT
100-0020

SET
instax-12345678

CANCELN • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.
• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.

• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
5 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.

259

Network/USB Setting Menus

4 Use the focus stick (focus lever) todisplay the picture you want to print,then press MENU/OK.

8

Tethered Photography
The camera can be controlled remotely and photographs
taken from a computer connected via USB or wireless or
wired LAN.

• Tethered Photography via USB (P 260)
• Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN (P 262)
• Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 267)
Tethered Photography via USB
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photography.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
Network/USB Setting Menus

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose either 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or 4: USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for SELECT CONNECTION
SETTING.

O • If 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-tography will be enabled automatically when the computer towhich the camera is connected is turned on. When the computer is off or not connected, tethered photography will be suspended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card.
• If the camera is disconnected from the computer while 4: USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to function in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded.

8

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 255).

260

Tethered Photography

4 Take pictures via tethered photography.

Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”.

N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Network/USB Setting Menus

8261

Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN
Connect to a wireless LAN to use a computer on the network fortethered photography.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATEUSING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose TETHERED SHOOTING (P 313).

2 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectfrom a list of existing connection setting profiles.

TETHER SHOOTINGCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTINGSELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTIONNEXT

4 Select WIRELESS LAN.

8

BACK

SELECT COMM SETTINGUSB
WIRELESS LANWIRED LANTETHER SHOOTING ON WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION
IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a newcommunication setting profile.

N You can also select or edit existing profiles.

262

COMM SETTINGUSB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2
WIFI_3
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

Tethered Photography

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings.

• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-ple Access Point Connections”(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265).

7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGNEXT

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGNEXT

8 Name the communication setting

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

9 Save the connection setting profile.
Press MENU/OK.

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

8NEXT

10 Select CREATE NEW.

BACK

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMCREATE NEW

263

11 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

12 Choose SELECT.

N The connection setting profile can

SETTING COMPLETE
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

also be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

SELECT
SKIP

13 Take pictures remotely from the computer.
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

Use software that supports tethered photography.

N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Simple Access Point Connections
Connect to a computer for tethered photography using the simple setup feature on your wireless LAN router.

1 Select SIMPLE SETUP.

N To select a wireless LAN router or en-

ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP.

264

ACCESS POINT SETTINGSIMPLE SETUPMANUAL SETUPSET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)

Tethered Photography

2 Follow the on-screen instructions to

SIMPLE SETUP

ready the wireless LAN router.

N You also have the option of connect-

ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.

3 Press MENU/OK when setup is com-

PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHINGCONNECT BY PIN CODECANCELMANUAL SETUP

plete.

REGISTRATION COMPLETED

END

1 Select MANUAL.

N Select AUTO to assign the camera an
IP address automatically.

2 Enter an IP address.

WIRELESS LA
LANPOINT SETTINGACCESS POP
AUTO
IP ADDRES
ADDRESSSS SETTINGMANUALNEXT

Network/USB Setting Menus

Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to a computer for tethered photography using a manually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address
and other network settings.

000.000.000.000

8IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAY ADDRESSDNS SERVER ADDRESS

265

• Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.

• Select SUBNET MASK and enter asubnet mask.

• Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and enNetwork/USB Setting Menus

ter a gateway address.

IP ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

CANCELENTER

CANCELSUBNET MASKSETGATEWAY ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

• Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS andenter a DNS server address.

CANCELDNS SERVER ADDRESS

SET

8
ENTER

266

CANCELTethered Photography

Tethered Photography via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to wired LANs (Ethernet networks) for tethered photography using network computers.

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.

2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATEUSING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose TETHERED SHOOTING.

3 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

4 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTINGSELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTIONNEXT

5 Select WIRED LAN.

BACK

SELECT COMM SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

from a list of existing connection setting profiles.

TETHER SHOOTING8USB
WIRELESS LANWIRED LANTETHER SHOOTING ON WIRED LAN CONNECTION
IMAGES ARE NOT SAVED TO THE MEMORY CARD

267

6 Select CREATE NEW to create a new

COMM SETTINGUSB
WIFI_1

communication setting profile.

WIFI_2
WIFI_3

N You can also select or edit existing pro-

WIFI_4

files.

WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

7 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as-

signed by the network.
• Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in“Connecting Using an IP Address”(P 265).
Network/USB Setting Menus

8 Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings.

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

AUTO

NEXT

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

AUTO

NEXT

9 Name the communication setting
profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

8
ENTER

CANCEL

10 Save the connection setting profile.
Press MENU/OK.

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTING

NEXT

268

BACK

Tethered Photography

11 Select CREATE NEW.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMCREATE NEW

12 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

13 Choose SELECT.

PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

also be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

SELECT
SKIP

14 Take pictures remotely from the computer.

Use software that supports tethered photography.

N • For more information on tethered photography, visit the website below.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Network/USB Setting Menus

N The connection setting profile can

SETTING COMPLETE

8269

Uploading Files to Frame.io
Upload files to Frame.io (P 425).

• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 270)
• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 272)
N Confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date before proceeding.

Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to Frame.io via wireless LAN.

1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud >CONNECT.

Frame.io Camera to Cloud

CONNECTDISCONNECT
SELECT FILE TYPEUPLOAD SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

UPLOAD STATUS
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECTUSER

2 Select WIRELESS LAN.

NOT CONNECTEDCONNECTWIRELESS LANWIRED LANGET PAIRING CODENETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

3 Select ACCESS POINT SETTING.
Select IP ADDRESS SETTING tochoose the IP address manually as
described in “Connecting Using an IP
Address” (P 273).

270

NOT CONNECTEDWIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGFINISHUploading Files to Frame.io

4 Select SIMPLE SETUP.

N To select a wireless LAN router or en-

ter the router SSID manually, choose
MANUAL SETUP.

5 Follow the on-screen instructions to

ACCESS POINT SETTINGSIMPLE SETUPMANUAL SETUPSET UP CONNECTION TO
DESTINATION PC(SIMPLE BUTTON OPERATION)SIMPLE SETUP

ready the wireless LAN router.

N You also have the option of connect-

ing using a PIN. Display the camera
PIN by pressing the focus stick (focus
lever) up and enter it on the wireless
LAN router.

CONNECT BY PIN CODECANCELMANUAL SETUP

plete.

REGISTRATION COMPLETED

END

7 Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.

A pairing code will be displayed.

WIRELESS LANAAAAAA003
SUCCESSGO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
CHANGE NETWORKGET PAIRING CODEFINISH

8 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and enter the pairing code displayed on the camera.

9 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275).

271

Network/USB Setting Menus

6 Press MENU/OK when setup is com-

PUSH WPS BUTTON ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER UNTIL LAMP ON
Wi-Fi ROUTER STARTS FLASHING

8

Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to Frame.io via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.

2 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud >CONNECT.

Frame.io Camera to Cloud

CONNECTDISCONNECT
SELECT FILE TYPEUPLOAD SETTINGUPLOAD STATUS
NETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECT
USER

3 Select WIRED LAN.
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

NOT CONNECTEDCONNECTWIRELESS LANWIRED LANGET PAIRING CODENETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECTUSER

4 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as-

signed by the network.
• Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in“Connecting Using an IP Address”(P 273).

5 Once connected, select GET PAIRING
CODE.

A pairing code will be displayed.

272

NOT CONNECTEDIP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTINGFINISHWIRED LANAAAAAA003
SUCCESSGO TO Frame.io AND
ENTER PAIRING CODE TO CONNECT
CHANGE NETWORKGET PAIRING CODEFINISHUploading Files to Frame.io

6 Sign in to Frame.io from a computer or other device and enter the pairing code displayed on the camera.

7 Upload files to Frame.io (P 275).
Connecting Using an IP Address
Connect to Frame.io using a manually-created network/USB setting profile giving the IP address and other network settings.

1 Select MANUAL.

N Select AUTO to assign the camera an
IP address automatically.

ACCESS POP
POINT SETTINGAUTOIP ADDRES
ADDRESSSS SETTINGMANUALNEXT

000.000.000.000

Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Enter an IP address.

WIRELESS LALANIP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAY ADDRESSDNS SERVER ADDRESS• Select IP ADDRESS and enter an IP
address.

IP ADDRESS

SET

8• Select SUBNET MASK and enter asubnet mask.

ENTER

CANCELENTER

CANCELSUBNET MASK

SET

273

• Select GATEWAY ADDRESS and enter a gateway address.

GATEWAY ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

• Select DNS SERVER ADDRESS andenter a DNS server address.

CANCELDNS SERVER ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

Network/USB Setting Menus

Connection Status
The status of the connection to Frame.io isshown by an icon in the electronic viewfinderor LCD monitor.

Icon(white)8(amber)(gray)(red)274

Connection status
Connected to Frame.io.
Camera has temporarily suspended upload toFrame.io. To resume, select Frame.io Camera
to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > TRANSFER/SUSPEND > TRANSFER.
Not connected to Frame.io.
Frame.io server has set camera status to “paused”.
To restore connection, clear “paused” status using
computer or other device.

Uploading Files to Frame.io

Uploading Items to Frame.io
Uploading Selected Items Using “Frame.io Camera to Cloud”

1 Select Frame.io Camera to Cloud in network/USB settingsmenu.

2 Select UPLOAD SETTING > SELECT
IMAGE & TRANSFER.

UPLOAD SETTINGSELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
TRANSFER/SUSPENDIMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
ROOT CERTIFICATENETWORK
Frame.io
PROJECTUSERWIRELESS LANCONNECTEDAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

io using a computer or other device. Note that some characters may
not display correctly, in which case they will be replaced by question
marks (“?”).

3 Mark items for upload.

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

Highlight photos and movies andpress MENU/OK to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in theother slot or display only items thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all items, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two items with the AEL button also selects all
items between them.
SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTING

275

Network/USB Setting Menus

N • The NETWORK field shows how the camera is connected to the network and the Frame.io field, the status of the connection to Frame.io.
• The PROJECT and USER fields show information supplied to Frame.

84 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected items will be uploaded
to Frame.io.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
BACK

Filtering Items/Choosing a SlotTo switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only items thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the selection dialog.

• To display only items that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING.
• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

Network/USB Setting Menus

BACKO Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 items.
• If ON is selected for Frame.io Camera to Cloud > IMAGE TRANSFER

WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera is
off.

8

276

Uploading Files to Frame.io

Uploading Photos and Movies as They Are Taken
Photos and movies shot with ON selected for Frame.io Camera
to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
in the network/USB setting menu are automatically marked for
upload.
Selecting Photos and Movies for Upload During Playback
If HFrame.io TRANSFER ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIALSETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can mark files for upload or change or remove their upload marking using the Fn1
button during playback.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8277

Uploading Files via FTP
You can connect the camera to an existing FTP server andupload pictures via FTP.
Connecting to FTP Servers• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 278)
• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 281)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connect to an FTP server via wireless LAN.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATE
Network/USB Setting Menus

USING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose FTP TRANSFER.

2 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectfrom a list of existing connection setting profiles.

FTP TRANSFERCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTING

8

SELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTION

NEXT

278

BACK

Uploading Files via FTP

4 Select WIRELESS LAN.

SELECT COMM SETTINGWIRELESS LANWIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING

TRANSFER IMAGES TOFTP SERVER VIA WIRELESS LAN

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a newcommunication setting profile.

N You can also select or edit existing profiles.

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings.

ple Access Point Connections”(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265).

7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.

USB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2
WIFI_3
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEWWIRELESS LAN

Network/USB Setting Menus• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-COMM SETTINGACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGNEXT

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGNEXT

8

8 Name the communication setting
profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

279

9 When prompted, press MENU/OK andadjust settings for connection to the
FTP server (P 285).

FTP SERVER SETTINGSELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATEDNEXT

BACK

10 Save the connection setting profile

when adjustments to settings arecomplete.
Press MENU/OK.

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTINGNEXT

11 Select CREATE NEW.

BACK

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMCREATE NEW

12 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

8

280

Uploading Files via FTP

13 Select OK to test the connection.

When a prompt is displayed statingthat the test was successful, press
MENU/OK.

TEST THE CONNECTION?

OKNO

N If the test ends in failure, check thecommunication setting profile andnetwork settings.
14 Choose SELECT to finish creating theconnection setting profile.

SETTING COMPLETE
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

N The connection setting profile canalso be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

SELECT
SKIP

Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Connect to an FTP server via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Connect to the network by plugging an Ethernet cable into
the camera’s LAN connector.

2 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATEUSING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose FTP TRANSFER.

3 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectfrom a list of existing connection setting profiles.

FTP TRANSFERCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

281

Network/USB Setting Menus

15 Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288).

8

4 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTINGSELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTIONNEXT

5 Select WIRED LAN.

BACK

SELECT COMM SETTINGWIRELESS LANWIRED LAN
USB SMARTPHONE TETHERING

TRANSFER IMAGES TOFTP SERVER VIA WIRED LAN

6 Select CREATE NEW to create a new
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

COMM SETTING

communication setting profile.

USB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2

N You can also select or edit existing pro-

WIFI_3
WIFI_4

files.

7 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as-

signed by the network.
• Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in“Connecting Using an IP Address”(P 265).

8 Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings.

WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

282

AUTO

NEXT

AUTO

Uploading Files via FTP

9 Name the communication setting
profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

ENTER

CANCEL10 When prompted, press MENU/OK andadjust settings for connection to the
FTP server (P 285).

FTP SERVER SETTINGSELECT CREATE NEW
IF FTP SERVER SETTING HAS NOT BEEN
CREATEDNEXT

BACK

11 Save the connection setting profile

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTINGNEXT

12 Select CREATE NEW.

BACK

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE

Network/USB Setting Menus

when adjustments to settings arecomplete.
Press MENU/OK.

USB WEBCAM

8CREATE NEW

13 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

283

14 Select OK to test the connection.

When a prompt is displayed statingthat the test was successful, press
MENU/OK.

TEST THE CONNECTION?

OKNO

N If the test ends in failure, check thecommunication setting profile andnetwork settings.
15 Choose SELECT to finish creating theconnection setting profile.

SETTING COMPLETE
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

N The connection setting profile canalso be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

Network/USB Setting Menus

16 Upload pictures to the FTP server (P 288).

8284

SELECT
SKIP

Uploading Files via FTP

Adjusting Settings for Connection to FTP Servers
Adjust settings for connection to the destination FTP server.

1 Select CREATE NEW in the FTP server

FTP SERVER SETTING

settings display.

N You can also select or edit existing set-

CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

tings.

2 Choose an FTP server type.

CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

FTP SERVER TYPE

FTP
FTPS
SFTP

FTP SERVER ADDRESS

SET

ENTER

4 Enter the FTP server port number.

CANCELPORT NUMBER

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Enter the FTP server address.

8

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

285

5 Choose whether to use a proxy server.
In this case we’ll choose DISABLE.

N Choose ENABLE to enter the address

PROXY SERVER

ENABLEDISABLEand port number for a proxy server.

6 Choose whether to enable PASV

PASSIVE MODE

mode.

ENABLEDISABLE

7 Select USER NAME & PASSWORD.
Network/USB Setting Menus

Enter the user name and password
used for login to the FTP server.

N • For connection to servers that do not

LOGIN

ANONYMOUS
USER NAME & PASSWORD

require a user name and password,
select ANONYMOUS.
• Selecting FTPS for FTP SERVER
TYPE lets you choose the authentication method. If desired, you canload a self-signed root certificate
using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING >ROOT CERTIFICATE.

8

8 Choose the destination folder.

SPECIFY TARGET FOLDER• Choose ROOT FOLDER to upload

pictures to the server’s root directory.
• To select a different folder, choose
SPECIFY FOLDER.

286

ROOT FOLDERSPECIFY FOLDER

Uploading Files via FTP

9 Choose the procedure used when

the destination contains files withthe same names as the pictures selected for upload.
• Select YES to overwrite the existing
files.
• Select NO to rename the uploaded
files by adding numbers at the endsof the file names (e.g., “DSCF0001_(0).JPG”).

10 Name the FTP server settings.

The chosen name will appear in the
FTP server list.

OVERWRITE SAME FILE NAMEYESNOFTP SERVER NAME

SET

Network/USB Setting Menus

8287

Uploading Pictures to FTP Servers
Select pictures for upload to an FTP server.

• Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING(P 288)• Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (P 290)
• Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback (P 290)

Selecting Pictures for Upload Using FTP OPTIONAL SETTING

1 Select FTP OPTIONAL SETTING in the network/USB settingmenu.

2 Choose SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER

Network/USB Setting Menus

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
SELECT FILE TYPE
CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
TRANSFER/SUSPENDSELECT IMAGE AND TRANSFERTO SELECTED FTP SERVER

3 Select TRANSFER.

N If you choose PRIORITY TRANSFER,
any pictures you then select will be
uploaded to the FTP server before pictures selected using TRANSFER.

SELECT IM
MA & TRANSFER
IMAGE
AUTO IMAGG TRANSFER ORDER
IMAGE
SELECT FI
IL TYPE
FILE
TRANSFERCAPTION FOF
FOR FTP TRANSFERPRIORITY TRANSFER
TRANSFER/SUSPEND
TRANSFERR/
SELECT IMAGE A
AND TRANSFERTO SELECTED FTFFTP SERVER

8

4 Mark pictures for upload.

SELECT IMAGE
FRAME

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK
to mark them for upload.
• To switch to the memory card in theother slot or display only picturesthat meet selected criteria, press
DISP/BACK before marking begins.
• To select all pictures, press the Q button.
• Selecting any two pictures with the AEL button also selects
all pictures between them.

288

SELECT ALL

SELECT RANGE

SELECT

FINISH/SETTINGUploading Files via FTP

5 Press DISP/BACK and select START

TRANSFER.
The selected pictures will be uploaded to the FTP server.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFINISH IMAGE SELECT AND
START TRANSFER
BACK

Filtering Pictures/Choosing a SlotTo switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures thatmeet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.

• To display only pictures that meet selected criteria, choose FILTERING.
• To switch to the memory card in the other slot,
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.

SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFERSTART TRANSFERFILTERINGSWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOTFILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONSO Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing upload marking.

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 9999 pictures.
• If ON is selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > IMAGE TRANSFER

WHILE POWER OFF, upload will continue even while the camera isoff.

Network/USB Setting Menus

BACK

8

289

Uploading Files via FTP

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Pictures taken with ON selected for FTP OPTIONAL SETTING >AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB setting
menu are automatically marked for upload.
Selecting Pictures for Upload During Playback
If b FTP TRANSFER ORDER or c FTP PRIORITY TRANSFER
ORDER is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > a Fn1
BUTTON SETTING, you can mark pictures for upload or changeor remove their upload marking using the Fn1 button during
playback.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8290RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of thecamera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 255).

RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.

N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Network/USB Setting Menus

4 Launch X RAW STUDIO.

8

291

Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Choose 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turnthe camera on (P 255).

4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Network/USB Setting Menus

Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.

N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

8292

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web
Browser
The camera supports remote movie recording. You canconnect to up to four cameras using a web browser on acomputer or tablet and record movies or adjust camera
settings.
Connecting to the Camera from a Web Browser
You can connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer or tablet and control it remotely.
Web browser
Network/USB Setting Menus

Wired LAN
(Ethernet)/
wireless LAN

Wired LAN
(Ethernet)/
wireless LAN

8
Computer/tablet

293

Before recording movies remotely, you will need to create a connection setting profile for use when connecting the camera to acomputer or tablet via wireless or wired LAN.

• Connecting via Wireless LAN (P 294)
• Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet) (P 299)
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting thecamera to a computer or tablet via wireless LAN.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATEUSING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.

Network/USB Setting Menus

2 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectfrom a list of existing connection setting profiles.

REMOTE REC FUNCTIONCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.
SELECT COMM SETTING

8

SELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTIONNEXT

4 Select WIRELESS LAN.

SELECT COMM SETTINGWIRELESS LANWIRED LANCONNECT TO NETWORKVIA WIRELESS LAN

294

BACK

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a newconnection setting profile.

N You can also select or edit existing profiles.

COMM SETTINGUSB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2
WIFI_3
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

6 Adjust wireless LAN settings.

• ACCESS POINT SETTING: See “Sim-ple Access Point Connections”(P 264).
• IP ADDRESS SETTING: See “Connecting Using an IP Address” (P 265).

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT(for example, one that operates in the 5 GHz band).

7 After adjusting wireless LAN settings,
select NEXT.

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTINGNEXT

8 Name the communication setting
profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

Network/USB Setting Menus

N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point

8

ENTER

CANCEL

295

9 Create a user name and password foruse when connecting to the camera
from a computer or tablet.
Press MENU/OK.

10 Enter a user name.

USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING

USER NAME & PASSWORD ISREQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER

NEXT

BACK

ENTER

CANCELENTER

CANCELEND

EDIT

USER NAME

SET

11 Enter a password.

PASSWORD

Network/USB Setting Menus

SET

12 Choose a server type.

N If you choose HTTPS, you will needto import a root certificate into thebrowser on your computer or tablet(P 298).

8

13 The camera will display the settings
you selected.
Press MENU/OK.

N You will need this information whenconnecting to the camera from a computer or tablet.

296

SERVER TYPE

HTTP
HTTPS

USER NAMEPASSWORDSERVER TYPE

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

14 Save the connection setting profile.
Press MENU/OK.

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTINGNEXT

15 Select CREATE NEW.

BACK

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMCREATE NEW

16 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

17 Choose SELECT.

N The connection setting profile canalso be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

SETTING COMPLETE
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

SELECT
SKIP

Network/USB Setting Menus

SET

818 Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).

297

Connecting via HTTPS
If you selected HTTPS for SERVER TYPE, you will need to import a root
certificate into the browser on your computer or tablet. Instructions on
downloading and installing a root certificate are available from the following website:
https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/rootcer/

Network/USB Setting Menus

8298

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting via Wired LAN (Ethernet)
Create a connection setting profile for use when connecting thecamera to a computer or tablet via wired LAN (Ethernet).

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING > CREATEUSING WIZARD in the network/USB setting menu andchoose REMOTE REC FUNCTION.

2 Select CREATE NEW.

N Choose SELECT FROM LIST to selectfrom a list of existing connection setting profiles.

REMOTE REC FUNCTIONCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

SELECT COMM SETTINGSELECT COMM SETTINGTO USE THIS FUNCTIONNEXT

4 Select WIRED LAN.

BACK

SELECT COMM SETTINGWIRELESS LANWIRED LAN

8CONNECT TO NETWORKVIA WIRELESS LAN

5 Select CREATE NEW to create a newcommunication setting profile.

N You can also select or edit existing profiles.

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Press MENU/OK when prompted.

COMM SETTINGUSB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2
WIFI_3
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

299

6 Adjust IP ADDRESS SETTING.

• Select AUTO to use an IP address as-

signed by the network.
• Select MANUAL to choose the IP
address manually as described in“Connecting Using an IP Address”(P 265).

7 Select NEXT to proceed after adjusting IP address settings.

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

AUTO

NEXT

IP ADDRESS SETTING

IP ADDRESS SETTING

AUTO

NEXT

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

8 Name the communication setting
profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

ENTER

CANCEL

9 Create a user name and password foruse when connecting to the camera
from a computer or tablet.
Press MENU/OK.

10 Enter a user name.

USER NAME & PASSWORD SETTING

USER NAME & PASSWORD ISREQUIRED TO ACCESS FROM BROWSER

NEXT

BACK

ENTER

CANCELUSER NAME

SET

300

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

11 Enter a password.

PASSWORD

SET

12 Choose a server type.

N If you choose HTTPS, you will needto import a root certificate into thebrowser on your computer or tablet(P 298).

13 The camera will display the settings

N You will need this information whenconnecting to the camera from a computer or tablet.

CANCEL

END

EDIT

HTTP
HTTPS

USER NAMEPASSWORDSERVER TYPE

14 Save the connection setting profile.
Press MENU/OK.

EDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME

SAVE THE SETTING AS A
CONNECTION SETTINGNEXT

15 Select CREATE NEW.

Network/USB Setting Menus

you selected.
Press MENU/OK.

ENTER

SERVER TYPE

8BACK

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMCREATE NEW

301

16 Name the connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

SET

17 Choose SELECT.

N The connection setting profile canalso be selected later using SELECTCONNECTION SETTING.

SETTING COMPLETE
PLEASE SELECT CREATED SETTINGFROM "SELECT CONNECTION SETTING"

SELECTSKIP

18 Connect to the camera from a computer or tablet (P 303).
Network/USB Setting Menus

8302

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting to the Camera from a Computer or Tablet
Connect to the camera from a web browser on a computer ortablet.

N We recommend using (connecting via) a high-speed access point (forexample, one that operates in the 5 GHz band).

Connecting the first camera
Connect by using a web browser to enter the IP address or usinga camera app to scan the QR code displayed by the camera.
Connecting using an IP address

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/
XXXXXXXXX.........

3 An entry screen appears. Enter theuser name and password.
The remote recording display will appear in the browser.

8

Please sign-in to the camera

USER NAME:PASSWORD:
OK

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.
Launcha web browser on your com2
puter or tablet and enter the camera’s IP address in the address bar.
To connect to a camera with an IP
address of 192.168.0.11, for example,
enter “http://192.168.0.11”.

Cancel303

Connecting by scanning a QR code

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.

2 Launch the camera application on the tablet and scan the

QR code.
The web browser launches, and the remote recording display
appears.

Connecting a second or subsequent camera
Either enter the IP address in the remote recording display in the
web browser or scan the QR code to connect.
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

N When you connect a second or subsequent camera, set the same
SERVER TYPE as the first camera beforehand (P 298).

Connecting using an IP address

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
The IP address of the camera is displayed.
2 Click or tap the thumbnail of the +mark in the “Choose camera” area ofthe remote recording display.

3 An entry screen appears. Enter thecamera’s IP address and an accountname and password.
The remote recording display will appear in the browser.

304

Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in

Address:
USER NAME
E:
Connect via QR CodePASS
PASSWORD:PASSWOASSWOSOKCancelRemote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Connecting by scanning a QR code

N To connect a second or subsequent camera by scanning a QR code, set

SERVER TYPE of the first camera and second and subsequent cameras
to HTTPS in advance.

1 Select INFORMATION > HARDWARE INFO in the network/
USB setting menu.
A QR code is displayed.
2 Tap the thumbnail of the + mark in
the “Choose camera” area.

the QR code displayed by the camera.
The remote recording display will appear in the browser.

Please specify an additional camera, and sign-in

Address:
USER NAME
E:
Connect via QR CodePASSWPASSWOPASSWORD:S
OK

CancelDisconnecting a second or subsequent camera
To end a connection after adding a camera, select the “remove connected
device” option in the “Remote recording” menu and click or tap the thumbnail for the camera you want to remove.

305

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Tap “Connect via QR Code” to scan

8

The Remote Recording Display
The controls available in the remote recording display are detailed below.

N The display layout varies with the size of the computer or tablet screen,among other factors.

Overview

K

AA
Network/USB Setting Menus

BJ
I H GF

8

306

E

D

C

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Item
Camerasettings
A

B Choose for REC/STOPC STOP button
D REC button
E Choose camera
Check button for movies inF memory card

G Camera settings (advanced)

I Display mode button
J Remote recording menu
K Camera lock button

N If you end the connection to a camera while it is locked, its controls willremain disabled, in which case you will need to turn the camera off.

Network/USB Setting Menus

H Screen lock button

Description
Adjust settings for the current camera.
Choose the camera or cameras to which theselected action (starting or stopping recording)will apply.
Stop movie recording.
Start movie recording.
A list of thumbnails showing the views throughthe lenses of the connected cameras. Click or
tap a thumbnail to select a camera to control.
View the movies on the memory card in thecurrent camera.
Adjust (advanced) settings for the current
camera.
Enable or disable the controls in the remoterecording display.
Switch displays.
Adjust remote recording settings (P 309).
Lock or unlock the current camera, enabling or
disabling its controls.

8307Choose Camera
The views through the lenses of the connected cameras areshown in a thumbnail list. Click or tap a thumbnail to select acamera to control.

A B
B

D C
Setting
Network/USB Setting Menus

A Recording time available
B Card slot options
C Battery level

8

D Thumbnail frame

308

Description
The remaining recording time. When the timeremaining grows short, the thumbnail will ﬂash
and the recording time will be displayed in red.
Camera storage settings. The icon for thecurrent slot is shown in orange. The display
turns red if the camera is unable to record to
the current card.
The battery level. The thumbnail will ﬂash
when the battery runs low.
A frame appears around the thumbnail for thecurrent camera. Regardless of whether they are
currently selected, cameras that are currently
recording are highlighted in red or, duringhigh-speed recording, in green.

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Remote Recording Menu
Adjust remote recording settings.
Show histogram
Hide or view the histogram.
Show microphone level
Hide or view the microphone recording level.
Show WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE
Hide or view the waveform/vectorscope (P 190).
Show tool bar
Hide or view the browser toolbar.

N • Prioritizing image quality maximizes image quality but may result in
display lag.
• Prioritizing real-time display keeps display lag to a minimum regardless of such factors as connection speed.

Light mode/Dark mode
Switch between the light- and dark-mode remote recording displays.
Stop the camera connection
Click or tap a thumbnail in the “Choose camera” area to end theconnection to the selected camera.

309

Network/USB Setting Menus

Display with Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority
Choose how you prefer the view through the lens to be displayed, giving priority either to image quality or to ensuring thatthe picture updates in real time.

8Recording Movies RemotelyStart recording on one or more remote cameras or end recording
on selected cameras without ending recording on others.

1 The cameras to which the chosen action (starting or stop-

ping recording) will apply can be selected in the “Choose for
REC/STOP” area.
Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selectedcameras will be highlighted.

2 Click or tap the “REC button”.

The selected cameras will start recording and their thumbnails will be highlighted in color.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

3 To end recording, select the desired cameras in the “Choose

for REC/STOP” area.
Select cameras by clicking or tapping the numbers in the“Choose for REC/STOP” area. The numbers for the selectedcameras will be highlighted.

4 Click or tap the “STOP button”.

The selected cameras will stop recording.

Viewing Movies
View movies recorded to the camera memory card.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2 Click or tap the “Check button for movies in memory card”.
The files on the camera memory card will be displayed.

310

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Saving and Loading Camera Settings
Save settings for connected cameras to the computer or tablet orload previously-saved settings.
Saving Camera Settings
Save camera settings to a settings file on the computer or tablet.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2 Select “Backup” in the “Camera settings (advanced)” menu.

BackupSettings for the selected camera will be saved to a settings
file on the computer or tablet.

Loading Saved Settings
Load saved settings onto a selected camera.

1 Select a camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2 Select “Restore” in the “Camera set-

Network/USB Setting Menus

3 Click or tap “Save settings”.

8tings (advanced)” menu.

Restore3 Select the desired settings file and click or tap “Load settings”.
The settings will be copied to the selected camera.

N • The location and procedure for loading files varies with the computeror tablet.
• Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used.
311

Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser

Copying Settings to Other Cameras
Settings can be copied to multiple cameras simultaneously.

1 Select the source camera in the “Choose camera” area.
2 Select “Copy” in the “Camera settings(advanced)” menu.

Copy

3 Select the destination cameras andNetwork/USB Setting Menus

click or tap “Copy”.
The settings currently in effect on thesource camera will be copied to thedestination cameras.

Copy

N Only files created with cameras of the same type can be used.

8

312

Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings fromthe shooting or playback display, press
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB
setting) tab.

NETWORK/USB SETTINGCREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTINGSELECT CONNECTION SETTINGAIRPLANE MODE
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTINGPRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Frame.io Camera to CloudFTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTINGEXIT

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
Create or edit connection setting profiles.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION

SETTING > CREATE USING WIZARD
in the network/USB setting menu.

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTINGCREATE USING WIZARD
EDIT/CHECKCREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

Network/USB Setting Menus

CREATE USING WIZARD
Choose network/USB and communication settings for a connection setting profile.

8313

2 Choose the desired network/USB settings.

CREATE USING WIZARDSMARTPHONE APP
USB CARD READER
WEBCAM
PRINTER PRINTTETHER SHOOTINGCONNECT TO SMARTPHONE APP

N To use any of the following pre-existing connection setting profiles, choose SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
• 1: UNIVERSAL SETTING• 2: USB CARD READER• 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
• 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED• 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE• 6: USB WEBCAM
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

3 Select CREATE NEW.

Choosing a tethered photography
option displays the options shown.
To create a new profile, select CREATENEW.

TETHER SHOOTINGCREATE NEW
SELECT FROM LIST

CREATE NEW CONNECTION SETTING
USING WIZARD

4 Adjust network/USB settings.

For more information, refer to the section on the setting inquestion.
• “Tethered Photography” (P 260)
• “Uploading Pictures via FTP“ (P 278)
• “Remote Movie Recording Using a Web Browser“ (P 293)

N Saved connection setting profiles are marked by icons indicating thecommunication setting profile.

314

Network/USB Setting Menus

EDIT/CHECK
View or edit existing connection setting profiles.

N The instructions that follow are devoted chiefly to choosing commu-

nication settings for connection setting profiles used in tethered photography.

1 Select CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION

SETTING > EDIT/CHECK in the network/USB setting menu.

CREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTINGCREATE USING WIZARD
EDIT/CHECKEDIT AND CHECK EXISTINGCONNECTION SETTING

2 Choose a connection setting profile.
to 6: USB WEBCAM) are not available.

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO
USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAMNISHIAZABU STUDIONOT CREATED

3 Select EDIT/CHECK.

• To copy an existing connection set-

SELECT CONNECTIONN
SETTING

UNIV
USB
B
USB
B

EDIT / CHECK

COPY
ting profile, select COPY. Choosing
USB
B
CONNECTION TEST
USB
B
ERASE
an existing profile as the destinaUSB
B
NISHIAZABUNISSHSTUDIOtion overwrites the profile selected
NOT CREATED
in Step 2.
• To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.
• To delete the selected connection setting profile, selectERASE.

315

Network/USB Setting Menus

N Options 1 to 6 (1: UNIVERSAL SETTINGSELECT CONNECTION SETTING

8

4 Select COMM SETTING.

7: STUDIO_TETHER
2:

WiFi_STUDIOFINISHEDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
COMM SETTINGFTP SERVER SETTINGREMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTINGN • To rename the connection setting profile, select EDIT
CONNECTION SETTING NAME.
• If the chosen connection setting profile is for FTP upload, selectFTP SERVER SETTING to view or edit settings for connection to
the FTP server (P 285).
• If the chosen connection setting profile is for the remote record
function, select REMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING to view oredit settings for remote movie recording (P 296, 301).

Network/USB Setting Menus

5 Choose an existing communication
setting profile.

N To create a new profile, select CREATENEW.

6 Select EDIT/CHECK.

• To save the selected communica-tion setting profile to the current
connection setting profile, choose
SELECT.

8

COMM SETTINGUSB
WIFI_1
WIFI_2
WIFI_3
WIFI_4
WIFI_5
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

COMM SETTINGTIN

USB
WIFI_1
WIFI__1
WIFI_2
WIFI__2
WIFI_3
WIFI__3
WIFI__4
WIFI_4

SELECTEDIT / CHECK
COPY
ERASE
CONNECTION TESTWIFI_5WIFI__5CREATECREA
AT NEW
CREATECREA
ATE NEW• To copy an existing communication setting profile, select

COPY. Choosing an existing profile as the destination overwrites the profile selected in Step 5.
• To delete the selected communication setting profile, select ERASE. Deleting a communication setting profile saved
to a connection setting profile also deletes the connection
setting profile.
• To test the connection, select CONNECTION TEST.

316

Network/USB Setting Menus

7 Review the settings displayed and se-lect END to proceed without making
changes. To edit settings, press thefocus stick (focus lever) to the right.
You can now edit the communication setting profile as described in“Simple Access Point Connections”(P 264) and “Connecting Using an
IP Address” (P 265).

8 After editing the communication setting profile, select NEXT.

2:

WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3

NETWORK TYPEWIRELESS LANSECURITY TYPE

WPA3

SSID

123456789

IP ADDRESS SETTING MANUALIP ADDRESS

255.255.255.255

SUBNET MASK

255.255.255.255

GATEWAY ADDRESS 255.255.255.255
DNS SERVER ADDRESS ABCDEFGHIJK
END

EDIT

WIRELESS LANACCESS POINT SETTING
IP ADDRESS SETTING
NEXT

profile.

COMM SETTING NAME

SET

ENTER

10 Choose SELECT to save the edited
communication setting profile to thecurrent connection setting profile.

CANCEL

8

8: WIFI_ODAIBA_MC3
SELECT THIS COMM SETTING?

SELECTSKIP

11 Select FINISH to end editing.

7: STUDIO_TETHER
2:

Network/USB Setting Menus

9 Name the communication setting

WiFi_STUDIOFINISHEDIT CONNECTION SETTING NAME
COMM SETTINGFTP SERVER SETTINGREMOTE REC FUNCTOIN SETTING

317

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING
Select a connection setting profile.
ProfileNetwork/USB Setting Menus

8

Description
Connect using the smartphone app or print pictures on
1: UNIVERSAL SETTING
instax printers.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone via
2: USB CARD READER
USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
3: USB TETHER
Control the camera and take photographs remotely.
SHOOTING AUTO
• Select 3: USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO to automatically enable tethered photography when thecomputer to which the camera is connected is turned
on. Tethered photography is disabled while the computer is oﬀ.
4: USB TETHERSHOOTING FIXED• If 4: USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected,
the camera will continue to function in tethered photography mode even when not connected to a computer.
Harness the power of the camera’s image processing en5: USB RAW CONV./
gine when processing RAW pictures on a computer, or
BACKUP RESTORE
save or load camera settings.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
6: USB WEBCAM
webcam.
7–16: User-created Use network/USB settings saved using CREATE/EDIT
profilesCONNECTION SETTING.

318

Network/USB Setting Menus

Choosing a Connection Setting Profile
Follow the steps below to use pre-existing or user-created connection setting profiles.

1 Choose

SELECT
CONNECTION
SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.

NETWORK/USB SETTINGCREATE/EDIT CONNECTION SETTING
7:STUDIOSELECT CONNECTION SETTINGAIRPLANE MODE
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTINGPRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Frame.io Camera to CloudFTP OPTIONAL SETTING
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
EXIT

2 Choose the desired connection setting profile.

SELECT CONNECTION SETTING

UNIVERSAL SETTING
USB CARD READER
USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTONISHIAZABU STUDIOAIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetoothfeatures.
Options
ON

OFF

Network/USB Setting Menus

USB TETHER SHOOTING FIXEDUSB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
USB WEBCAM

8319

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smartphone-related settings.

N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of thesmartphone app.

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smartphone app has been installed.

Network/USB Setting Menus

8

SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION
Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the camera has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.

N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.
Bluetooth DEVICE LIST
List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than thesmartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.

320

Network/USB Setting Menus

Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect withpaired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
ON

OFF

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.
Options
ON

OFF

Options
ON

OFF

O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app isrunning. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have notbeen updated for over 30 minutes.

NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wirelessnetwork (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).

321

Network/USB Setting Menus

SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.
Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data frompaired smartphones or tablets.

8

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures topaired smartphones or tablets even while off.
OptionsON

OFF

RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE
Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing filesize for upload.
ON T
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

Options
ON U

OFFN • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected.
• Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M. Whenthe setting is ON T or ON U, images are compressed to about 12
megapixels or 6 megapixels, respectively. The size after compression
differs by the aspect ratio of the image.

WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n)

5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)

O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels
in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band ispermitted before selecting the 5 GHz option.
• The options available vary with the country or region of sale.

SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.

322

Network/USB Setting Menus

instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE
printers.
The Printer Name (SSID) and Password
The printer name (SSID) can be found on thebottom of the printer; the default password is“1111”. If you have already chosen a different
password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.

CONNECT
Connect to Frame.io.
OptionWIRELESS LANWIRED LANGET PAIRING CODE

Description
Connect via wireless LAN.
Connect via wired LAN.
View the pairing code for connection to the Frame.io project.

N The pairing code can only be viewed when the camera is connected
to Frame.io.

DISCONNECT
End the connection to the Frame.io project and terminate the
network connection.

323

Network/USB Setting Menus

Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Adjust settings for use with Frame.io.

8

SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of files uploaded to Frame.io. You can select ordeselect each file type individually.
Options
MOV - ProRes
OTHER MOV/MP4
HEIF
TIFF

MOV - PROXY
RAW

JPEG

UPLOAD SETTING
Adjust settings Frame.io upload settings.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload.
Network/USB Setting Menus

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark photos and movies for uploadas they are taken.
Options
ON

OFF

TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume upload to Frame.io.
Options
TRANSFER

8324

SUSPEND

Network/USB Setting Menus

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of files to Frame.io will continue while
the camera is off.
Options
ON

OFF

ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a root certificate to the camera for use with Frame.io.
OptionDescription
LOAD FROM STORAGE
Copy the root certiﬁcate from the camera memory card.
MEDIA
DELETE
Delete the current root certiﬁcate.

same root certificate. Changing one changes the other.

UPLOAD STATUS
View Frame.io upload status.
TRANSFER QUEUE
View a list of the files awaiting upload.
RESET TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all files selected for upload toFrame.io.

325

Network/USB Setting Menus

N Frame.io and FTP OPTIONAL SETTING > ROOT CERTIFICATE use the8FTP OPTIONAL SETTING
Adjust settings for FTP upload.
SELECT IMAGE & TRANSFER
Mark picture for upload (P 288).
AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
Select ON to automatically mark pictures for upload as they aretaken.
Options
ON

Network/USB Setting Menus

SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the types of files uploaded to the FTP server. You can select or deselect each file type individually.
Options
JPEG

RAW

HEIF

TIFF

MOV

MP4

CAPTION FOR FTP TRANSFER
Add captions to photos and movies during upload.
Option8

OFF

DEFAULT CAPTIONCREATED CAPTIONNO CAPTION

Description
Add the caption selected for D SAVE DATA SETTING >DEFAULT CAPTION.
Create new captions or select existing captions.
Do not add captions to pictures during upload.

TRANSFER/SUSPEND
Pause or resume FTP upload.
Options
TRANSFER

326

SUSPEND

Network/USB Setting Menus

IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, upload of pictures to the FTP server will continue while the camera is off.
Options
ON

OFF

FTP POWER SAVING
If ON is selected, the network feature will turn off to save power
when the upload of all pictures currently marked for transfer iscomplete. Marking additional pictures for upload turns the network feature on again.
Options
OFF

ROOT CERTIFICATE
Copy a unique root certificate to the camera for use when FTPS is
selected for FTP SERVER TYPE (P 285).
OptionDescription
LOAD FROM MEMORY
Copy the root certiﬁcate from the camera memory card.
CARD
DELETE
Delete the current root certiﬁcate.

N FTP upload and Frame.io Camera to Cloud > UPLOAD SETTING >ROOT CERTIFICATE use the same root certificate. Changing one
changes the other.

RESET FTP TRANSFER ORDER
Remove upload marking from all pictures selected for upload to
the FTP server in the current connection setting profile.

327

Network/USB Setting Menus

ON

8USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
OptionDescription
The camera switches between power delivery and data transAUTO
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
COMM OFFthe drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
OFF/COMM ON the connected device.

O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from
Network/USB Setting Menus

devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM
ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.

N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while thecamera is off.

8328

Network/USB Setting Menus

INFORMATION
View network-related settings.
OptionDescription
View the camera’s wireless and wired LAN Mac addresses and
HARDWARE INFO
IP addresses, and Bluetooth MAC address.
TRANSFER ORDER View upload progress and the destination for ﬁles uploaded to
STATUS
Frame.io or via FTP.
ERROR
View the content of errors when a C or B icon is displayed
DESCRIPTION (P 457).

RESET NETWORK/USB SETTING
Reset network/USB settings to default values.
Network/USB Setting Menus

8

329

MEMO

330

The Setup Menus

331

USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, andchoose USER SETTING.

USER SETTINGFORMATbAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
x MY MENU SETTINGF MY MENU SETTINGSENSOR CLEANINGEXITFORMAT
To format a memory card or USB-connected SSD:

1 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format andpress MENU/OK.

N An SSD connected to the USB connector can also be selected.
3 A confirmation dialog will be disThe Setup Menus

9

played. To format the memory card,
highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

N To exit without formatting the memory

card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.

FORMAT
FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?
ERASE ALL DATAOKCANCELO • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from thememory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a computer or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.

N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing and holding

the center of the rear command dial while pressing and holding theb (Delete) button.

332

USER SETTINGb AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.
AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
OptionON
OFF

Description
Daylight saving time on.
Daylight saving time oﬀ.

DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:1 Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.
2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) left or right to highlight the

3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

The Setup Menus

year, month, day, hour, or minute and press up or down tochange. To change the order in which the year, month, andday are displayed, highlight the date format and press thefocus stick up or down.

9333

TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone tothe local time at your destination when traveling. To specify thedifference between your local and home time zone:

O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before selecting a local time zone using g LOCAL.

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.
2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose the local timezone. Press MENU/OK when settings are complete.

N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL andpress MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home timezone, select h HOME.
Optionsg LOCALh HOMEThe Setup Menus

N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about threeseconds when the camera is turned on.

9334

USER SETTING

Qa
Choose a language.
x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 377).
F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized custom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 377).

The Setup Menus

9335

SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
OptionOK

Description
Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF oﬀ (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the camera turns oﬀ in playback mode).

N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed
using a blower (P 438).

BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as anumber between 0 and 4. The higher thenumber, the older the battery.

BATTERY AGE

The Setup Menus

N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend thatbatteries be replaced as they wear out.

9336

USER SETTINGRESETReset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.
OptionDescription
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK andpress MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

REGULATORY
To view electronic copies of the product model number, andother certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.

9337

SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SOUND SET-UP.

SOUND SETTING

AF BEEP VOL.
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUNDsELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUMEsELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
EXIT

AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
The Setup Menus

Optionsb (high)9338

c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

SOUND SETTINGOPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera controls are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

F REC START/STOP VOLUME
Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical orelectronic front-curtain shutter.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)

The Setup Menus

9339

tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
i SOUND 1

Options
j SOUND 2

k SOUND 3

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Optionsb (high)c (medium)d (low)

eOFF (mute)s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
i SOUND 1

The Setup Menus

9340

Options
j SOUND 2

k SOUND 3

SOUND SETTINGPLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
0

1

2

3

4

Options
5

6

7

8

9

10

4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
OptionDescription

XLR

The camera plays audio recorded via external microphones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.

CAMERAThe camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
microphone or external microphones connected via themicrophone jack.

N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display bypressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).

The Setup Menus

9341

SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
SCREEN SET-UP.

SCREEN SETTING

VIEW MODE SETTINGEVF BRIGHTNESSEVF COLOREVF COLOR ADJUSTMENTLCD BRIGHTNESSLCD COLORLCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT

VIEW MODE SETTING
Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 20).
EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
OptionAUTO
The Setup Menus

9

MANUAL

Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selectedlevel in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
and +5.

EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
−5

342

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

SCREEN SETTINGEVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT(focus lever).

SETCANCEL2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

9343

LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

Options
0
+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
−5

−4

−3

−2

−1

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.

1 Adjust colors using the focus stick (focus lever).
2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

9344

SCREEN SETTINGIMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
OptionCONTINUOUS
1.5 SEC
0.5 SECOFF

Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
point, press the center of the focus stick (focus lever); press again
to cancel zoom.
Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.
• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
OptionsON

OFF
The Setup Menus

9345

PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
OptionDescription
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a ﬂash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this option in situations in which both exposure and white balanceOFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a ﬂash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.

NATURAL LIVE VIEW
Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,and other settings are visible in the monitor.
OptionThe Setup Menus

ON

OFF

9

346

Description
The eﬀects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hardto-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will diﬀer fromthose in the ﬁnal picture. The display will however be adjusted
to show the eﬀects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The eﬀects of ﬁlm simulation, white balance, and other settings
can be previewed in the monitor.

SCREEN SETTING

F-Log VIEW ASSIST
Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent toBT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON

OFF

ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING
Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 27).
FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
OptionG GRID 24

F GRID 9PP

A six-by-four grid.

Frame HD pictures in thecrop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of thedisplay.

N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayedusing D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 25).

347

The Setup Menus

DisplayP

For “rule of thirds” composition.

H HD FRAMING

9

AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON

OFF

PLAYBACK MAGNIFICATION
Choose the zoom ratio selected when the center of the rear command dial is pressed during playback.
OptionDescription
2x (FROM CENTER) View the center area of the picture at the selected zoom
4x (FROM CENTER) ratio. Regardless of the setting selected, pictures will not be
8x (FROM CENTER) displayed at greater than actual size.
ACTUAL SIZE
View the picture at actual size, centered on the focus area.
(FROM FOCUS POINT) The zoom ratio varies with the size of the image.
Display each picture at the same zoom ratio as the previous
PREVIOUS MAG.
picture, starting at the center of the image. Pictures will not,
(FROM CENTER)
however, be displayed at greater than actual size.
The Setup Menus

FOCUS SCALE UNITS
Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERS

9

348

FEET

SCREEN SETTINGDUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
OptionDescription
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.

EVF FULL SCREEN MAGNIFICATION
Choose the magnification of the full-screen EVF display.
Options
1.00x

0.94x

0.89x

0.83x

N The screen magnification cannot be changed when D POWER
MANAGEMENT > PERFORMANCE is either EVF FRAME RATEPRIORITY (120P) or EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.). With
these settings, the screen magnification is set to 0.77x.

The Setup Menus

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display(P 25).

9349

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)
Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfinder. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5

OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 17).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, thebutton can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 385).

The Setup Menus

9350

SCREEN SETTINGLARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)
Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF

ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE
INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 19).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, thebutton can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)and off (OFF) (P 385).

The Setup Menus

9351

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP >LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD).

LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING

Expo. DISP.
Scale
L1
L2
L3
L4
R1
R2

OptionA Expo. DISP.
B d Scale
C L1, L2, L3, L4
D R1, R2, R3, R4

Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left sideof the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the rightside of the screen.

INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.
Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
HIGH CONTRAST
High contrast.
STANDARD
Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST
Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.

9352

SCREEN SETTINGLOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smartphone.
Options
ON

OFF

SUB MONITOR SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed in the secondary LCD monitor.
Separate displays are available for still photography and movie
recording. Choose from the following:
OptionINFORMATIONDIALSHISTOGRAM

Description
Display camera settings. You can choose the settings
displayed.
Display dials showing ISO sensitivity and shutter speed.
Display a histogram.

N You can switch between displays by pressing the secondary LCD monitor mode button.

1 Select D SCREEN SET-UP > SUB MONITOR SETTING in the
setup menu.

2 Highlight STILL MODE or MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.
3 Highlight INFORMATION and press
SUB MONITOR SETTING(STILL)

MENU/OK.

INFORMATIONDIALSHISTOGRAM

353

The Setup Menus

The INFORMATION Display
Follow the steps below to choose the indicators shown in the
INFORMATION display.

9

4 Highlight the indicator you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
SUB MONITOR SETTING INFORMATION(STILL)

dScaleSHUTTER SPEED
APERTUREISOSHOOTING MODE
IMAGE SIZE
WHITE BALANCEFILM SIMULATION

5 Highlight the indicator you wish todisplay and press MENU/OK.

Still Photography Mode
Choose from:The Setup Menus

9• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPO. COMP.
• ISO• SHOOTING MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• DRIVE MODE
• FOCUS MODE
• WHITE BALANCE• IMAGE SIZE354

DISPLAY 1 SETTINGSHUTTER SPEED
APERTURE
EXPO. COMP.
ISO
WHITE BALANCENONE• IMAGE QUALITY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• 35mm FORMAT MODE
• BOOST MODE
• DUAL IS MODE
• SELF-TIMER• COMMUNICATION STATUS• NONESCREEN SETTING

Movie Mode
Choose from:• TIME CODE
• REMAINING TIME/REC. TIME
• REMAINING TIME
• REC. TIME
• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE• EXPO. COMP.
• ISO• SHOOTING MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• FOCUS MODE
• WHITE BALANCE• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• IMAGE FORMAT• BOOST MODE
• DUAL IS MODE
• SELF-TIMER• COMMUNICATION STATUS• NONE

6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to change additional indicators.

N The d Scale indicator can only be enabledor disabled.

The Setup Menus

d Scale9355

SCREEN SETTING

SUB MONITOR BACKGROUND COLOR
Adjusting the background color of the secondary LCD monitor
according to lighting conditions makes the display easier to read.
OptionBLACK
WHITE

Description
Recommended for use with dark ambient lighting.
Recommended for use with bright ambient lighting.

N The background is displayed in white when the secondary LCD monitor backlight is on.

x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENTBLACK

F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it isdisplayed during movie recording.
The Setup Menus

Options
TRANSPARENT

9

356

BLACK

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK,
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
xEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FEDIT/SAVE QUICK MENUFUNCTION (Fn) SETTINGCOMMAND DIAL SETTINGo S.S. OPERATIONCOMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
SHUTTER AF
EXIT

FOCUS LEVER SETTING
Choose the functions performed by the focus stick (focus lever).
OptionLOCK (OFF)

Description
The focus stick cannot be used during shooting.
Press the stick to view the focus-point display and tilt the stick
PUSH n TO UNLOCK
to select a focus point.
Tilt the stick to view the focus-point display and select a focus
ON
point.

F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 379).

357

The Setup Menus

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still photography (P 379).

9

FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 385).
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
OptionFRONT COMMAND
DIAL 1FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 2

Description
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aperture (APERTURE) * to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE)FRONT COMMAND
to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3
DIAL 3.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), aperREAR COMMAND ture (APERTURE) *, exposure compensation (EXPOSURE
COMPENSATION), sensitivity (ISO), or no role (NONE) to
DIAL
the rear command dial.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using either or
EXP. COMPENSATION
both of the front and rear command dials while the function
ASSIGNMENT
button assigned to exposure compensation is pressed.
The Setup Menus* Aperture ring rotated to A or C in mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual).
DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing andN • COMMAND
holding the center of the front command dial.
• You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONTCOMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.

9358

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGo S.S. OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the command dials.
Options
ON

OFF

COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION
Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated tochoose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials canbe adjusted separately.
OptionDescription
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
item.
Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.

SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button ispressed halfway.
Description

AF-S• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
AF-C

halfway.

• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

359

The Setup Menus

Option9SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button ispressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be adjusted separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual focus).
Options
ON

OFF

N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shottaken in burst mode.

SHOOT WITHOUT LENS
Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is attached.
OptionsON

OFF

The Setup Menus

SHOOT WITHOUT CARD
Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option
ON
OFF

9

360

Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released totest camera function and the shooting and setup menus can bedisplayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

FOCUS RING
Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to increase the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise)Y CCW (counterclockwise)

FOCUS RING OPERATION
Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the movement of the focus ring.
OptionNONLINEAR
LINEAR

Description
Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated, but the focusing speed is unaﬀected by the speed the ringis rotated.

AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until it is pressed again.
SWITCH

9

361

AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance atthe value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
OptionDescription
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSINGAWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
the lock.
SWITCH

EXPO. COMP. BUTTON SETTING
Control the behavior of the rear command dial and the button
to which exposure compensation is assigned. If d ON WHEN
PRESSING is selected, exposure compensation can be adjusted
by holding the button while rotating dial; if d ON/OFF SWITCH
is selected, exposure compensation can be set by pressing the
button once, rotating the dial, and then pressing the button
again.
The Setup Menus

Optionsd ON WHEN PRESSING

9362

d ON/OFF SWITCHBUTTON/DIAL SETTING

a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING
Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
OptionDescription
Pressing the button marks the current picture for transfer. If thea SMARTPHONE
camera is not currently paired with a smartphone, Bluetooth/
TRANSFER ORDER
SMARTPHONE SETTING options will be displayed.
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can bed SELECT & selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
SMARTPHONE is paired (P 233). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options
will be displayed instead.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to anb FTP
TRANSFER ORDER FTP server.
Pressing the button marks the current picture for priority uploadc FTP PRIORITY
to an FTP server. The picture will be moved to the head of the
TRANSFER ORDER
upload queue.
HFrame.io Pressing the button marks the current picture for upload to
TRANSFER ORDER Frame.io.
r WIRELESSThe button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATIONThe Setup Menus

9363

TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.
x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
Touch controls disabled.

x DOUBLE TAP SETTING
OptionON
OFF

Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
shooting.
Touch zoom disabled.

c TOUCH FUNCTION
OptionON
OFF

Description
Enable touch-function gestures.
Disable touch-function gestures.

The Setup Menus

a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Option
ON
OFF

9

364

Description
The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
Touch controls disabled.

BUTTON/DIAL SETTINGEVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls whilethe viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can beselected from:
Option
6
0
2
4
1
3
5
OFF

Description
All.
Right half.
Top right quarter.
Bottom right quarter.
Left half.
Top left quarter.
Bottom left quarter.
Touch controls disabled.

LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
OptionFUNCTION
SELECTION

Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION ischosen for LOCK SETTING.

N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any

time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock thecontrols, press and hold the button again.

365

The Setup Menus

Description
Choose from the following:• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTIONLOCK SETTING •SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.

9POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose POWER MANAGEMENT.

POWER MANAGEMENTAUTO POWER OFFPERFORMANCESHOOTING STAND BY MODE
AUTO POWER SAVE
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

EXIT

AUTO POWER OFF
Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automatically when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN

The Setup Menus

9

366

2 MIN

1 MIN

30 SEC

15 SECOFF

POWER MANAGEMENTPERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and EVF display performance.
OptionBOOST

Choose for standard focus and EVF display performance and battery endurance.

367

The Setup Menus

NORMAL

Description
Boost camera focus and EVF display performance. The battery
drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
You can choose to assign priority to:• AF PRIORITY - NORMAL: Focus speed.
• AF PRIORITY - LOW LIGHT: Focus speed while adjusting EVF
and LCD brightness to make objects in shadows easier to see.
Some ghosting may be visible with blurred images.
• EVF RESOLUTION PRIORITY: Viewﬁnder resolution.
• EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P): The refresh rate for the
EVF is increased, smoothing motion.
• EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.): The refresh rate
for the EVF is increased beyond EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY(120P) smoothing motion still further. The EVF may darken.
N • Regardless of the option selected, the camera functions in AF PRIORITY - NORMAL mode while themonitor is on.
• The D SCREEN SET-UP > EVF FULL SCREENMAGNIFICATION setting cannot be changed wheneither EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) or EVF
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (240P EQUIV.) is set. With
these settings, the screen magnification is set to0.77x.

9

POWER MANAGEMENTSHOOTING STAND BY MODE
Choose the delay before the camera enters shooting standby
mode.
Option
5 MIN
2 MIN
1 MIN
30 SEC
15 SECOFF

Description
The camera will suspend all functions and enter powering-saving (standby) mode if no operations are performed
for the selected period.
Shooting standby mode disabled.

AUTO POWER SAVE
If ON is selected, the display frame rate will drop to save power if
no operations are performed for a short period, but the normal
frame rate can be restored by operating camera controls.
OptionsON

OFF

The Setup Menus

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.
If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will firstdisplay a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, automatically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.
Option9

STANDARD

HIGH

368

Description
The camera turns oﬀ automatically when its temperaturereaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher thanthe STANDARD value, extending the time available torecord movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
with the camera at these high temperatures could resultin low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.

SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings,
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab,and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP.

SAVE DATA SETTINGFRAME NO.
EDIT FILE NAMExCARD SLOT SETTINGSELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDERCOPYRIGHT INFODEFAULT CAPTION
IPTC
EXIT

FRAME NO.
Frame number
New pictures are stored in image files named
using a four-digit file number assigned byadding one to the last file number used. The
Filefile number is displayed during playback as Directory
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file numbering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
OptionRENEW

N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will bedisabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.

369

The Setup Menus

CONTINUOUS

Description
Numbering continues from the last ﬁle number used or the ﬁrst
available ﬁle number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
reduce the number of pictures with duplicate ﬁle names.
Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a newmemory card is inserted.

9

EDIT FILE NAME
Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
OptionsRGB
AdobeRGB

Default prefix
DSCF
_DSF

Sample file name
ABCD0001_ABC0001

x CARD SLOT SETTING
Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
OptionSEQUENTIALBACKUPSEPARATE

Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in theﬁrst slot is full.
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the ﬁrst slot and
JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only takes eﬀect when SUPER FINE+RAW, FINE+RAW
or NORMAL+RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITYSETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.

The Setup Menus

SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)
Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
SLOT 19370

SLOT 2

SAVE DATA SETTINGSELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
OptionSELECT FOLDER

CREATE FOLDER

Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
stored, press the focus stick (focus lever) up or down tohighlight an existing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a ﬁve-character folder name. The new folder will becreated with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.

COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.

The Setup Menus

OptionDescription
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyrightinformation recorded with existing images is not aﬀected.

9371

DEFAULT CAPTION
Choose the caption applied to new photos and movies.
DISPLAY
View the current caption.
EDIT
Enter a caption.
ERASE
Delete the current caption.
IPTC
Choose IPTC metadata applied to new photos.
EMBED IPTC
If ON is selected, IPTC metadata is embedded in new photos.
Options
OFF

The Setup Menus

ON

EDIT/CHECKEnter IPTC metadata or check IPTC metadata that is currently registered.

9

RESET
Delete metadata that is currently registered.

372

SAVE DATA SETTINGGEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
OptionsON

OFF

The Setup Menus

9

373

MEMO

374

Shortcuts

375

Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a custom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-function gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option

Description
Add frequently-used options to this custom“My menu”
menu, which can be viewed by pressing
MENU/OK and selecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu
Use the Q menu to view or change the options
selected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to
The function buttons
selected features.
Use touch function button ﬂick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access togesturesselected features.

Shortcuts

10

376

P
377

379
385
390

MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in theshooting display and select the E (MYMENU) tab.

MY MENU

SELF-TIMER
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTINGFILM SIMULATIONGRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRYSHUTTER TYPEIS MODEgFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTINGEXITO The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to
MY MENU.

MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USERSETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or
F MY MENU SETTING.

N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.

MY MENU SETTINGADD ITEMSRANK ITEMSREMOVE ITEMSTo delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.

2 Press the focus stick (focus lever) up

IMAGE SIZEIMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIFFILM SIMULATIONMONOCHROMATIC COLORGRAIN EFFECTCOLOR CHROME EFFECTOK

SELECTCANCELN Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.

Shortcutsor down to highlight ADD ITEMS andpress MENU/OK. Options that can be
added to “my menu” are highlighted
in blue.

xMY MENU SETTING

10

377

MY MENU

3 Select a menu to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.

Press the MENU/OK button again to return to the menu selection screen.

4 Select a menu to be registered next

and press the MENU/OK button. Selectthe order of the menus to be registered and press the MENU/OK button.

SELECT ITEM LOCATION

1 IMAGE SIZE
2 IMAGE QUALITY

MOVE

5 Repeat Step 4 and register “my menu”.

SAVE

To exit “my menu” registration, press the DISP/BACK button.

N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.

Shortcuts

10

378

The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. Toview the quick menu, press the Q button.
The Quick Menu Display
The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:
Still photography

SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AESETF IMAGE SIZEG IMAGE QUALITY
H FILM SIMULATION

Default
I HIGHLIGHT TONEJ SHADOW TONEK COLORL SHARPNESSM SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTIONN
SETTINGO SUBJECT DETECTION SETTINGP FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.

379

Shortcuts

A SHOOTING MODEB ISO
C DYNAMIC RANGED WHITE BALANCEE HIGH ISO NR

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

10

Movie recording

SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE

SETShortcuts

10

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A SHOOTING MODEI FILM SIMULATIONB SHUTTER SPEEDJ DYNAMIC RANGEC IMAGE FORMATK MOVIE MODE FRAME RATED WHITE BALANCEL F IS MODE
APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZEDg FACE/EYE DETECTION
E
M
CONTROL oL)
SETTINGF MOVIE ISO
N SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/GO BIT RATEASPECT RATIO
WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
HP WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE(WHEN k SELECTED)The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.

380

The Quick Menu

Viewing and Changing Settings
1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.

2 Use the focus stick (focus lever) to

SHOOTING MODE
PROGRAM AE

highlight items and rotate the rearcommand dial to change.

SET

LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.

can assign the Q button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q button’s default role to a function button(P 385).
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.

381

Shortcuts

3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete.
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you

10Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during
shooting.

N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photography and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.

2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the focus stick(focus lever) to highlight the item you wish to change andpress MENU/OK.

3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.
The following can be assigned to the quick menu.

N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.

Shortcuts

10

382

The Quick Menu

Available Items (Still Photography)
Choose from:• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• CLARITY• HIGH ISO NR• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• SELF-TIMER• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• ISO• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• FLASH COMPENSATION• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10

383

The Quick Menu

Available Items (Movies)• FILM SIMULATION• DYNAMIC RANGE• WHITE BALANCE• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP.
(WHEN k SELECTED)• HIGHLIGHT TONE
• SHADOW TONE
• COLOR• SHARPNESS• HIGH ISO NR• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING• MF ASSIST• TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• PHOTOMETRY• MOVIE ISO• IMAGE FORMAT• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
RATIO• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• BIT RATE
• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• MOVIE AF MODE
• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• F IS MODE
• F IS MODE BOOST• SHUTTER SPEED• APERTURE(MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)• WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS• EVF/LCD COLOR• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10384

Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.
The Function Buttons
Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the selected feature.
Function Button Defaults
The default assignments are:Back-of-Camera Function Buttons

Shortcuts

Function buttons
A AFON button
B Center of rear command dial
C Q (quick menu) button
D AEL (exposure lock) button

Default
AF-ON
FOCUS CHECKQUICK MENU
AE LOCK ONLY

10

385

Front-of-Camera Function Buttons

Function buttons
A Fn1 button
B Fn2 button
C Fn3 button
D Fn4 button
E Fn5 button
F Fn6 button

Shortcuts

10

386

Default
FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF
EXPO. COMP.
SUB MONITOR MODEPERFORMANCEELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH

Function Controls

Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons
The roles played by the function buttons can be selected using
the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.

• ISO• IS MODE• 35mm FORMAT MODE
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• COOLING FAN SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• SUB MONITOR MODE
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• COMMAND DIAL LOCK• AE LOCK ONLY
• AF LOCK ONLY
• AE/AF LOCK
387

Shortcuts• EXPO. COMP.
• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• MF ASSIST ON/OFF• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING• FOCUS BKT SETTING• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING

10• AF-ON• AWB LOCK ONLY
• LOCK SETTING• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK• NONEN To disable the function button, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10388

Function Controls

AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.
MODELING FLASHIf MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mounted flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire theflash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).
TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >TTL-LOCK MODE (P 175).
RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING
Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been assigned can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved toposition C1 (CUSTOM 1) on the mode dial. Pressing the button asecond time restores the previous settings.

Shortcuts

10389

Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.

N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCHSCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

Touch-Function Gesture Defaults
The default assignments for the different gestures are:Shortcuts

Touch-Function Gestures
A T-Fn1 (flick up)
B T-Fn2 (flick left)
C T-Fn3 (flick right)
D T-Fn4 (flick down)

10

390

Default
HISTOGRAM
FILM SIMULATION
WHITE BALANCESHUTTER TYPE

Function Controls

Assigning Roles to Touch-Function Gestures
The roles played by touch-function gestures can be selected using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
option in the setup menu.

• ISO• IS MODE• 35mm FORMAT MODE
• WIRELESS COMMUNICATION• FLASH FUNCTION SETTING• TTL-LOCK• MODELING FLASH• HIGH SPEED REC• F SELF-TIMER• FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION• WAVEFORM/VECTORSCOPE• F IS MODE BOOST• ZEBRA SETTING• COOLING FAN SETTING• INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVELADJUSTMENT• 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK• MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL• CONNECT TO ATOMOS AirGlu BT• SUB MONITOR MODE
• PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD• PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL
MODE• NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• HISTOGRAM• ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH• LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• F-Log VIEW ASSIST• COMMAND DIAL LOCK• LOCK SETTING

Shortcuts• IMAGE SIZE• IMAGE QUALITY• RAW• FILM SIMULATION• GRAIN EFFECT• COLOR CHROME EFFECT• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT• DYNAMIC RANGE• D RANGE PRIORITY• WHITE BALANCE• CLARITY• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING• FOCUS AREA
• FOCUS CHECK• AF MODE• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF• AF RANGE LIMITER• FOCUS CHECK LOCK• MF ASSIST ON/OFF• SELF-TIMER• AE BKT SETTING• FOCUS BKT SETTING• PHOTOMETRY• SHUTTER TYPE
• FLICKER REDUCTION• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING

10

391

Function Controls• PERFORMANCE• AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER• Bluetooth ON/OFF• QUICK MENU
• PLAYBACK• NONEN To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.

Shortcuts

10392Peripherals and Optional
Accessories

393

Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
G-mount.
Lens Parts

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Lens hood
B Mounting marks
C Focus ring
D Aperture ring lock release
E Mounting marks (focal length)

F Aperture ring
G Lens signal contacts
H Front lens cap
I Rear lens cap

N A GF63mmF2.8 R WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

11

394

Lenses

Lens Care• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.

O Lens caps may differ from those shown.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare and protect the front
lens element.

11

395

Lenses

Aperture Rings
In modes A (aperture-priority AE) and M (manual), you can choose
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the lens aperture ring.

Aperture ringlock release
Setting
C(

)

A(

)

Other values (Aperture ring

Description
With the aperture ring in the C or A position, you can choose
the aperture (f-number) by rotating the camera commanddial.
) Set aperture to the selected value.

N To select C or A, or to select another value after selecting C or A, press the
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

aperture ring lock release while rotating the aperture ring.

T/S Lenses
View the shift amount or rotate amountof lenses on the EVF or LCD (P 25).
The shift and rotate amounts are displayed in increments of 0.5 mm and 3°,
respectively.

N The shift amount and rotate amount are also recorded to the EXIF dataof images that have been taken.

11

396

Viewfinder Tilt Adapters
The optional EVF-TL1 tilt adapter lets you swivel the viewfinder left or right ±45° or up or down between 0° and 90°.

A Hot shoe
B Tilt lock knob
C Adapter lock release
D Horizontal swivel lock

E Connectors
F Connector cover
G Hot shoe cover
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

397

Attaching the EVF-TL1
Slide the EVF-TL1 onto the camera hot
shoe and then attach the EVF-GFX3 electronic viewfinder.

N Remove the hot shoe covers from the camera and EVF-TL1 before attaching the adapter and viewfinder.

Removing the EVF-TL1
Remove the viewfinder and then, keeping thelock releases (A) pressed, press down on thefront of the adapter (B) and slide it from thecamera as shown.

O Use only one tilt adapter at a time.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

398

Viewfinder Tilt Adapters

Using the EVF-TL1
Swivel the viewfinder into the desired position.
Swiveling the Viewfinder Up or Down
Loosen the tilt lock knob and swivel the
viewfinder up or down from 0° to 90°.

With the viewfinder in the desired position (A), tighten the tilt lock knob (B)to lock the viewfinder in place.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Swiveling the Viewfinder Left or Right
Release the horizontal swivel lock asshown and swivel the viewfinder left or
right ±45°.

With the viewfinder in the desired position (A), return the horizontal swivel
lock to the latched position (B) to lockthe viewfinder in place.

11

399

External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be usedat shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, whileothers can function as commanders controlling remoteunits via optical wireless flash control.

O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for example when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.

Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when an option other than OFF is selected
for F FLASH SETTING > RED EYE REMOVAL and G AF/MF SETTING >FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is FACE DETECTION ON. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye” caused when light from the flash is reflectedfrom the subject’s retinas.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

400

External Flash Units

Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.

2 In shooting mode, select FLASHFUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASHSETTING) menu tab. The options
available vary with the flash unit.

FLASH SETTINGFLASH FUNCTION SETTING
RED EYE REMOVALTTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTINGCOMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING
EXIT

Description
P
Displayed when no compatible ﬂash unit is connected or
SYNC
if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or uses only 402
TERMINAL
the X-contact on the hot shoe.
SHOE MOUNT Displayed when an optional ﬂash unit is mounted on the
403
FLASH
hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional ﬂash unit functioning as a comCOMMANDER
mander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote ﬂash control is 406(OPTICAL)
connected and turned on.
Menu

unit or no flash unit is connected.

3 Highlight items using the focus stick

MODE(focus lever) and rotate the rear command dial to change the highlighted
setting.

SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST

END

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N SYNC TERMINAL will be also displayed if an incompatible flash

11

401

SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal oruses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL

ADJUST

Setting

END

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
Choose from the following options:• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower thanA Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if theunit uses long ﬂashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.
Choose whether the ﬂash is timed to ﬁre immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Syncit closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended inmost circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.

11

402

External Flash UnitsSHOE MOUNT FLASHThe following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST

END

Setting

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The ﬂash control mode selected with the ﬂash unit. This canin some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options available vary with the ﬂash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust ﬂash compensation (B).
• M: The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
• MULTI: Repeating ﬂash. Compatible shoe-mounted ﬂash
units will ﬁre multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The ﬂash does not ﬁre. Some ﬂash units can beturned oﬀ from the camera.

11

403

Setting

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Description
The options available vary with ﬂash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation (the full value may not beapplied if the limits of the ﬂash control system are exceeded). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the selected value is added to the value selected with the ﬂash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output (compatible units only).
outputChoose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the ﬂash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photo is taken.
F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible;•
C Flash mode (TTL) ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the shutter isreleased.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.

11

404

External Flash Units

Setting

D SyncE ZoomF Lighting

G Number of flashes *H Frequency ** Full value may not be applied if limits of ﬂash control system are exceeded.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

G LED light

Description
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
Note: Horizontal bands may appear in pictures taken using
AUTO FP(HSS) at some shutter speeds.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage formore even lighting.
Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photography (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catchlight and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI mode.

11

405

COMMANDER(OPTICAL)The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)

ADJUST

END

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice offour channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of opticalsignals between the commander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to
three groups (A, B, and C) and flash modeCand flash level adjusted separately forAeach group.
B

11

406

External Flash Units

Setting

A Flash control mode(group A)

B Flash control mode(group B)

C Flash control mode(group C)

D Flash compensation/
output (group A)
output (group B)

F Flash compensation/
output (group C)

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

E Flash compensation/

Description
Choose ﬂash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
• TTL: The units in the group ﬁre in TTL mode. Flash compensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you canspecify the output of the selected group as a percentage of the other and adjust overall ﬂash compensation
for both groups.
• M: In mode M, the units in the group ﬁre at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardlessof subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
in all groups to repeating ﬂash mode. All units will ﬁremultiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not ﬁre.
Adjust ﬂash level for the selected group according tooption selected for ﬂash control mode. Note that the fullvalue may not be applied if the limits of the ﬂash control
system are exceeded.
• TTL: Adjust ﬂash compensation.
• M/MULTI: Adjust ﬂash output.
• TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B andadjust overall ﬂash compensation.

11

407

Setting

G Flash mode (TTL)

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

H SyncI ZoomJ Lighting

408

Description
Choose a ﬂash mode for TTL ﬂash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The ﬂash ﬁres only as required; ﬂash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressedhalfway indicates that the ﬂash will ﬁre when the photois taken.
• F (STANDARD): The ﬂash ﬁres with every shot if possible; ﬂash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the ﬂash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The ﬂash will not ﬁre if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control ﬂash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes.
• R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain highspeed sync at shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for ﬂash control mode.
The angle of illumination (ﬂash coverage) for units that support ﬂash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to bemade from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will automatically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing coverage.
• K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coveragefor more even lighting.

External Flash Units

Setting

K Commander

K Number of flashes
L Channel
L Frequency

Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a commander for Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remote ﬂash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clipon ﬂash units that support Fujiﬁlm optical wireless remoteﬂash control.
• Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not aﬀect the ﬁnal picture.
Choose the number of times the ﬂash ﬁres each time the
shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for communication with the remote ﬂash units. Separate channels
can be used for diﬀerent ﬂash systems or to prevent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the ﬂash ﬁres in MULTI
mode.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

409

Vertical Battery Grips
The VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip can be used to supplement the camera battery or when holding the camera
rotated to take pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Fn1 button
B Fn2 button
C Fn3 button
D Shutter button
E Control lock
F Front command dial
G Fn5 button
H Fn6 button
I Lock screw knob
J Tripod socket
K Eyelet for camera strap
L Connector cover
M Lock screw

N Serial number plate
O Hanging hook
P Compartment for connector coversupplied with camera

Q AFON button
R Rear command dial
S Focus stick (focus lever)T Q (quick menu) button
U AEL (exposure lock) button
V Indicator lamps
W Battery tray
X Battery-chamber cover latch
Y Connector

N All controls perform the same function as the matching controls on
the camera.

11

410

Vertical Battery Grips

Attaching the Vertical Battery Grip

N Check that the camera is off before attaching or removing the verticalbattery grip.

1 Remove the connector cover.

Remove the vertical battery grip connector cover from thecamera (A) and the connector cover from the vertical battery
grip (B).

(A)

(B)

N The vertical battery grip connector cover of the camera (A) canbe placed in the compartment for the connector cover. Store theconnector cover of the vertical battery grip (B) so that is not lost
after removal.

While hooking the hanging hook in the hole to hook verticalbattery grip on the camera (A), attach the vertical battery
grip to the camera (B).
Hanging hook

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

2 Attach the vertical battery grip to the camera.

11

Hole to hook Vertical Battery
Grip

411

3 Rotate the lock screw knob to secure the vertical battery grip.

O • Fully tighten the lock screw knob after attaching the grip.
• Do not touch the contacts.
• After removing the grip, replace the vertical battery grip connector
cover (A) and connector cover (B).

• The grip is not waterproof, and caution is required to prevent the en-try of dirt, dust, water, noxious gases, salt, and other foreign matter.
Do not place the grip on wet surfaces. Before use, be sure that thebattery tray and battery-chamber cover are fully closed.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

412

Vertical Battery Grips

Inserting and Removing BatteriesInsert the batteries as shown.

The batteries can be removed as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N • Be sure the camera is off before exchanging batteries.
• Use only NP-W235 batteries.

11

413

Battery Level
When a vertical battery grip is connected, thecamera battery level display shows the camera
battery level and the level of the batteries inserted in the VG-GFX100II.

• The display shows the level of inserted batteries only.
• When a full complement of batteries are inserted in the camera and the
VG-GFX100II, the batteries will be used in the following order:
A The left grip battery (L)B The right grip battery (R)C The camera battery

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

414

Vertical Battery Grips

Charging the Batteries
The batteries in the vertical battery grip
will charge when the grip is attached toa camera that is connected to an AC-5VJ
AC adapter via a USB cable.
The indicator lamps will light green while
the battery charges; the lamp on the left
shows the status of the left battery, thelamp on the right the status of the rightbattery.

Indicator lamp
On
Oﬀ
BlinksBattery status
Battery charging
Charging complete
Battery fault

reduces charging times to as little as 180 minutes.

• The batteries will not charge while the camera is on.
• For more information, see “Charging the Battery” (P 50) and “TheBattery and Power Supply” (P 430).

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

O • All three batteries charge simultaneously; charging takes about
330 minutes.
• Using a device that supplies power with an outputs of 45 W or above

11

415

Cooling Fans
Cooling fans help keep the camera cool, allowing longer
periods of non-stop movie recording.
Attaching a Cooling FanOpen the monitor and attach an FAN-001 cooling fan.

O Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the fan.
1 Open the monitor.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

2 Remove the camera cooling fan connector cover and the

fan connector cap.
After removing the cooling fan connector cover (A), attach
it to the fan for safe-keeping. Keep the fan connector cap (B)in a safe place.

(A)

11

(B)
(A)

416

Cooling Fans

3 Place the fan on the camera, making sure the screws andconnectors are correctly aligned.

4 Tighten the screws.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

N The cooling fan may fall off if the screws are not sufficiently tightened.

11

417

Cooling Fans

Using the FanFan speed can be adjusted using the A SHOOTING SETTING >xF COOLING FAN SETTING and B MOVIE SETTING >xF COOLING FAN SETTING options in the photo and movie
menus, respectively. Select OFF to turn the fan off.

O • At some speeds, the noise of the fan may be audible in movies recorded with the camera.
• Depending on the LCD orientation, the EVF turns off, and the LCD
only turns on.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

418

Technical Notes

419

Accessories from Fujifilm
The following accessories are available from Fujifilm. For thelatest information on the accessories available in your region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be purchased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
FUJINON lenses
GF-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM G-mount.

Vertical battery grips
VG-GFX100II: See “Vertical battery grips” (P 410).
Tilt adapters
EVF-TL1: This adapter lets you swivel the viewﬁnder left or right ±45° or up or
down between 0° and 90° to take shots from diﬀerent angles.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewﬁnder eyecups to prevent lightleaking into the viewﬁnder window.

Mount adapters

Technical Notes

12

H MOUNT ADAPTER G: This mount adapter allows the camera to be used with SUPER EBC
FUJINON accessories for the GX645AF, giving you the use of one additional teleconverter and nine diﬀerent lenses.

Macro extension tubes
MCEX-18G WR/MCEX-45G WR: Mount this adapter between the lens and the camera
body for macro photography with large reproduction ratios.

View camera adapters
VIEW CAMERA ADAPTER G: This adapter is for use with lenses for older FUJINON large-format cameras, including lenses in the CM FUJINON series.

420

Accessories from Fujifilm

Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujiﬁlm optical wireless ﬂash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote ﬂash unit for remote wirelessﬂash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 ﬂash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL ﬂash control, this clip-on ﬂash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), allowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the ﬂash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote ﬂash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless commander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developedby Nissin Japan, this wireless ﬂash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on ﬂash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-42: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports manual and TTL ﬂash control.
EF-20: This clip-on ﬂash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) andsupports TTL ﬂash control (manual ﬂash control is not supported).
Cooling fans
FAN-001: See “Cooling Fans” (P 416).
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time
exposure. The RR-100 has a connector with a diameter of 2.5 mm; a third-party⌀2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapter is required for connection to the camera.
Technical Notes

Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.

12421

Accessories from Fujifilm

Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip.

Body caps
BCP-002: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.

instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax ﬁlm.

Technical Notes

12422

Software and Services for Use with Your
CameraThe camera can be used with the following software andservices. For the latest information on software available
from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and asmartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIXRAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conversion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free ofcharge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converterex-powered-by-silkypix/

N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-expowered-by-silkypix/
Technical Notes

12423

Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free ofcharge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm

N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

Capture One for Fujifilm
Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pictures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm

N Visit the website above for information on when support will be available.

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)
A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.

• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in

https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroomtether-plugin/

Technical Notes

FUJIFILM X AcquireThis computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/12424Software and Services for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner
Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 121).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
Frame.io Camera to Cloud
Send still images and movies directly from the camera to the
Frame.io platform via a network.
https://frame.io/

Technical Notes

12425

For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSInstructions: All the safety and operating instructions Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed• Read Instructions
should be read before the appliance is operated.

so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by

Instructions: The safety and operating instructions items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten• Retain Instructions

Technical Notes

12should be retained for future reference.
tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the where they exit from the appliance.
• Heed Warnings
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
Instructions: All operating and use instructions cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may• Follow Instructions
should be followed.
fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
Installation
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or soldfrom the type of power source indicated on the marking la- with the video product. Any mounting of the appliancebel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com- use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacpany. For video products intended to operate from battery turer.
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. An appliance and cart combination
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped should be moved with care. Quickwith a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having stops, excessive force, and unevenone blade wider than the other). This plug will ﬁt into the surfaces may cause the appliance andpower outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are cart combination to overturn.
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to ﬁt, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Antennas
Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cablepurpose of the polarized plug.
system is connected to the video product, be sure the anAlternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide somea three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
(grounding) pin. This plug will only ﬁt into a grounding-type Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding ofinsert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re- the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-inplace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conof the grounding type plug.
ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection toOverloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
cords as this can result in a risk of ﬁre or electric shock.
electrode.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prodPER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
Antenna Lead
Ground Clamp
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should neverin Wirebe blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
AntennaAnor other similar surface.
Discharge Unit
D
Electric Servicee EquipmenttThis video product should not be placed in a built-in instal(NECN SECTION
lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is8810-20)provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adGround Clamps
hered to. This video product should never be placed near orover a radiator or heat register.
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by Power Service Grounding Electrodethe video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. System (NEC ART 250. PART H)
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near water—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,and the like.

426

Grounding
Conductors (NECSECTION 810-21)

For Your Safety
Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product fromed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualiﬁed service personlight or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into thepower lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
video product.
• If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Use
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustthis video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualiﬁed technician to restore
a ﬁre or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perforLightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specoutlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
iﬁed by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics asprevent damage to the video product due to lightning andthe original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
ﬁre, electric shock or other hazards.
Service
Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs toServicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in propdangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualiﬁed service personnel.

Be sure to read these notes before use
Safety Notes• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these

The symbols on the product (including the accesories) represent the following:safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use.

AC

• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

DC

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious inWARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.

The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

WARNING
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove thebattery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
Unplugit is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
from power
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a ﬁre orsocketelectric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the camera or connecting cables. Do not use the camera orconnecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, disconnect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause aﬁre or electric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.

427

Technical Notes

This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.

Class II equipment (The construction of the productis double-insulated.)

12

WARNING
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This
Do not use in can cause a ﬁre or electric shock.
the bathroomor shower

Do notdisassemble

Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (never open the case). Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre or electric shock.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connection cord and do not place heavy objects on the connection cord. These actions could damage the cord andcause a ﬁre or electric shock. If the cord is damaged,
contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer. Do not use cables withbent connectors.
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. Thiscan cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause
injury.
Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do notuse shooting, playback, or any other operationsof the camera while operating a car or other vehicle. This can result in you falling down or being
involved in a traﬃc accident. If you take pictures
while walking, pay attention to your surroundings.
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during athunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due
to induced current from the lightning discharge.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load thebattery as shown by the indicator.

Technical Notes

Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or otherabnormalities. Use only designated chargers to recharge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to recharge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects.
Failure to observe these precautions could resultin the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, orleaking, causing ﬁre, burns, or other injury.
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified foruse with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the
power supply voltage shown. The use of other powersources can cause a ﬁre.

12428

WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with youreyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with cleanwater and seek medical attention or call an emergency
number right away.
Do not use the charger to charge batteries other thanthose specified here. The supplied charger is for use
only with batteries of the type supplied with thecamera. Using the charger to charge conventional
batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
visual impairment. Take particular care when photographing infants and young children.
Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in
low-temperature burns, particularly during prolonged use, at high ambient temperatures, when
HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
or with users who suﬀer from poor circulation or
reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod orsimilar precautions are recommended.
Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explosive gases, or dust.
When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover thebattery terminals with insulation tape. Contact withother metallic objects or batteries could cause thebattery to ignite or burst.
Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small partsout of the reach of small children. Children may
swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
attention or call emergency.
Keep out of reach of small children. Among the elements that could cause injury are the strap, which
could become entangled about a child’s neck,causing strangulation, and the ﬂash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
This product generates radio-frequency emissions
that could interfere with navigational or medical
equipment.

For Your Safety
CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a ﬁreor electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in locations such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a ﬁre.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This cancause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter isstill connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapter in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a ﬁre.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this precaution could result in ﬁre or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the battery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a ﬁre or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from thepower socket. Leaving the charger plugged into thepower socket can cause a ﬁre.
When a memory card is removed, the card could comeout of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it andgently release the card. Injury could result to thosestruck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.

Technical Notes

Request regular internal testing and cleaning for yourcamera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a ﬁre or electric shock. Contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
note that this service is not free of charge.
Dispose of the product in accord with location regulations.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.

12
429

The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read L Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections.
• Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neckWARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat laces or hairpins.
• Do not expose to ﬂame or heat.
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Do not disassemble or modify.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •• Use with designated chargers only.
cause leakage, overheating, ﬁre, or explosion.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries• Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery.
• Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to thetouch after extended use. This is normal.
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use.
L Caution: Disposal
L Notes on the Battery
The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects ofCharge the battery one or two days before use.
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera oﬀ when
Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
not in use.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adaptersbattery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera oﬀ before disconnecting the adapter. Disinsert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices.
• Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
• Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
L Charging the Battery
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.

Technical Notes

12charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
L Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery willhold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its service life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may ﬁnd that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds acharge. Charge the battery regularly.
Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approximately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.

L

430

For Your Safety
Using the Camera• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Trademark Information

Lenses and Other Accessories• Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
• Fujiﬁlm will not be held liable for performance issues orTechnical Notes

including artiﬁcial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark ofsuch as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor.
registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces• Strong sunlight focused through the viewﬁnder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Taiage the panel of electronic viewﬁnder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewﬁnder at the sun.
Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks ofApple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shotsregistered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registeredat weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Camera totest shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
Cloud, Frame.io, Lightroom and Photoshop are either regisfunctioning normally. FUJIFILM Corporation cannot accept
tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United Statesliability for damages or lost proﬁts incurred as a result of
and/or other countries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, andproduct malfunction.
Wi-Fi Protected Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Notes on Copyright
Alliance®. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use ofusing your digital camera system cannot be used in ways such marks by Fujiﬁlm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing of the CFA (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is aof stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPOto note that the transfer of memory cards containing images RATED. USB Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible of USB Implementers Forum. AirGlu™ is a trademark or regiswithin the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
tered trademark of Atomos. All other trade names mentioned
in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
Handling
their respective owners.
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are Electrical Interference
being recorded.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equipment. Consult with hospital or airline staﬀ before using the
Liquid Crystal
camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be taken to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action Color Television Systems
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color teleindicated should any of the following situations arise:• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the vision telecasting speciﬁcation adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
television system adopted mainly in European countries andrunning water.
• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, ﬂush the aﬀected eye with China.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
assistance.
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera ﬁle format in which• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly information stored with photographs is used for optimal colwith water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vomor reproduction during printing.
iting, then seek medical assistance.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed softalways lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and ware without the permission of the applicable governing
images recorded with the product are unaﬀected.
bodies is prohibited.

damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.

12
431

NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE

Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the government’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed theemission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25
Government.
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC measurement known as the Speciﬁc Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and conducted using standard operating positions accepted by(2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certiﬁed
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
power level in all tested frequency bands.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant this product must be used with a Fujiﬁlm-speciﬁed ferto Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro- rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, andthe product you have purchased. Please call
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how toused in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
recycle this battery.
interference to radio communications. However, there is noTechnical Notes

guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined byturning the equipment oﬀ and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diﬀerent
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modiﬁcations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

12
432

California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 4, Appliance Efﬁciency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
1609

For Your Safety
For Customers in Canada
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B)In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana- Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or indian ICES-003.
the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus- packaging indicates that this product shall not
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the be treated as household waste. Instead it should
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in- be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling ofterference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, electrical and electronic equipment.
including interference that may cause undesired operation By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you willof the device.
help prevent potential negative consequences to the enThis device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op- vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientiﬁc evi- as household waste.
dence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accuproof, however, that these low power wireless devices are mulators please dispose these separately according to yourabsolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels local requirements.
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural rebeing used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health sources. For more detailed information about recycling thiseﬀects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does product, please contact your local city oﬃce, your household
not produce heating eﬀects causes no known adverse health waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased theeﬀects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not product.
found any biological eﬀects. Some studies have suggested In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland andthat some biological eﬀects might occur, but such ﬁndings Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
have not been conﬁrmed by additional research. GFX100 II the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local auhas been tested and found to comply with IC radiation ex- thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicatesmeets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. that they are to be disposed of separately.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.

Technical Notes

Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke• very humid or extremely dusty• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration• exposed to strong magnetic ﬁelds, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides• next to rubber or vinyl products

12433

Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF230001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/gfx100-ii/pdf/gfx100-ii_doc-drs_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

Technical Notes

12This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):WLAN 2.4 GHz: 11.81 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 13.51 dBm
Bluetooth: 3.20 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United Statesembargoes goods.
device. Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems thatmay directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than oﬀered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions toensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujiﬁlm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter inthe vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic ﬁelds, static electricity, or radio interference thatmay prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity ofother wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater attention to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayedon your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have accessrights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated byproviders or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
The• following may be punishable by law:
- Disassembly or modiﬁcation or this device- Removal of device certiﬁcation labels• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also operates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Conﬁrm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the aﬀected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujiﬁlm representative.

434

For Your Safety• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-

uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when oﬀ. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certiﬁed output power level inall frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.119 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.

U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujiﬁlm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbHFujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany

Technical Notes

12435

For Your Safety
Be sure to read these notes before using the lens
Safety Notes

WARNING• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place.

About the Icons
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the information indicated by the icon is ignored and the product isused incorrectly as a result.
This icon indicates that death or serious
WARNING injury can result if the information is ignored.
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the information is ignored.
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the
instructions which are to be observed.
Triangular icons tell you that this information requires attention (“Important”).
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that theaction indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
action that must be performed (“Required”).

Do notimmerseDo not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to observe this precaution can cause a ﬁre or electric
shock.

Do notdisassemble

Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre, electric
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.

Should the case break open as the result of a fall or otheraccident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shockor in injury from touching the damaged parts. ReDo not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts
injury or electric shock, and take the product to thepoint of purchase for consultation.
Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
fall, causing injury.
Do not view the sun through the lens or camera viewfinders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
permanent visual impairment.

CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
Failure to observe this precaution can cause ﬁre orelectric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause ﬁre.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This productcould cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe thisprecaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause ﬁreor burns.

Technical Notes

When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps andstore out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by thelens can cause ﬁre or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other objects, causing injury.

12436

Product CareTo ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately witha soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is inplace.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the image sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.

Technical Notes

12437

Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING >SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as described below.

O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.

1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove
dust from the sensor.

N Do not use a brush or blower brush.

Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.

2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.

3 Replace the body cap or lens.

Technical Notes

12438

Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes notdescribed in the manual. For more information, visit:https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/
Checking the Firmware Version

O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card isinserted.

1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.
2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The
current firmware version will be displayed; check the firmware version.

3 Turn the camera off.

N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional accessories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, andmount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.

Technical Notes

12439

Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, contact your local Fujifilm distributor.
Power and Battery
Problem

Solution• The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not

Technical Notes

charged at shipment. Charge the battery before ﬁrst use(P 50).
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful•
The camera does not
ly-charged spare battery (P 50).
turn on.
• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct orientation (P 43).
• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the battery-chamber cover (P 43).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned oﬀ
The monitor does notand then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
turn on.
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pocket or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera immediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly.
• ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF oﬀ (P 152).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERYAGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 336).

12
440

Troubleshooting

Problem
The camera turns off
suddenly.
The camera does notturn off.

Solution
The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert afully-charged spare battery (P 50).
The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
(P 10).
• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly pluggedin (P 50).
• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
AC power adapter (P 50).
Charging does not start.
• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it witha new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 43).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation(P 43).
Charging does not start • Conﬁrm that the camera is connected to the computer(P 53).
(USB).
• If the computer is oﬀ or in sleep mode, turn on or wakethe computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB cable (P 53).
• Insert the battery.
Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
(battery charger).
• The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow.
Charge the battery at room temperature.

Technical Notes

12441

ProblemSolution• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery
does not charge.

with a soft, dry cloth (P 43).

• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERYAGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 336). If the battery still fails tocharge, contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer (P 420).
The power supply icon is Conﬁrm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is senot displayed.
lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING.

Menus and Displays
Problem

Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 58, 335).

Technical Notes

12442Troubleshooting

Shooting
Problem

Solution• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 45, 224).

• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory cardin the camera (P 332).

• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
No picture is taken
when the shutter
button is pressed.

with a soft, dry cloth.

• The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 45).

• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50).

• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on(P 54).

• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for

SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 360).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject isappears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder whenin noticeable mottling when images are previewed in thethe shutter button isdisplays. Images taken with the camera are unaﬀected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or manual focus (P 110).
The camera does not
focus.
• The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 99).

Technical Notes

12443

ProblemSolution• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, orother objects: Remove the obstructions (P 153).

• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:

Change the composition so that the subject’s face occupies a larger area of the frame (P 153).
No face is detected.
• The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the subject to face the camera (P 153).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 153).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible(P 155).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame(P 155).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 155).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 174).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170).
The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 8).
Technical Notes

12444Troubleshooting

Problem

Solution• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject inrange of the ﬂash.
The flash does not fully
The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
•
light the subject.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 78, 82, 464).
• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
(P 61).
Pictures are blurred.
• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is displayed in red: Check focus before shooting (P 62).
• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel
mapping (P 142).

Pictures are mottled.

* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interactingwith the image sensor may cause bright spots of various colors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
the occurrence of such bright spots.

• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool down (P 54,456).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera oﬀ andwait for it to cool down (P 54, 456).

Technical Notes

12
445

PlaybackProblem
Pictures are grainy.
Playback zoom isunavailable.

No sound in movie
playback.

Solution
The pictures were taken with a diﬀerent make or model ofcamera.
The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a diﬀerent
make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume(P 341).
• The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.

Selected pictures are notdeleted.
Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 228).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the camFile numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera oﬀ before opening the batunexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 369).

Technical Notes

12446

Troubleshooting

Wired Connections
Problem

Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 64).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewﬁnder. Usemonitor are blank.
the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 20).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 64).
No picture or sound• Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV.
(P 64).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the television to adjust the volume (P 64).
The computer does not Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
recognize the camera. (P 255).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO Check camera settings. If the camera is connected via
or FUJIFILM X Acquire USB, be sure 5: USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE
fails to correctly detect is chosen for SELECT CONNECTION SETTING.
the camera.
(P 291, 292).
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
Cannot connect to
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
iPhones or iPads.
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 254).
Confirm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
Cannot connect tofor connecting the camera varies with the type of connecsmartphone.
tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252).
Technical Notes

12
447

Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connections, visit:https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
ProblemCannot connect tosmartphone.
The camera is slow
to connect or upload
pictures to thesmartphone.
Upload fails or isinterrupted.

Solution• The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer(P 247).

• Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cordless phones (P 247).

• The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-Technical Notes

phone and camera can connect to only one device at atime. End the connection and try again (P 247).
• There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can makeCannot upload images. connection diﬃcult (P 247).
• The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
• The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies informats they do not support.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING >RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
Smartphone will notincreases upload times for larger images; in addition,
display pictures.
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 322).

12
448

Troubleshooting

Remote Movie Recording
Problem

Solution• The IP address is incorrect: Enter the correct IP address.

Note that the IP address may change unexpectedly if automatic IP address assignment is enabled (P 293).
• The access point for the computer or tablet is not configured
correctly: Be sure the access point for the computer or
The remote recording
tablet is conﬁgured correctly (P 293).
display does not appear
The camera is not on the same network as the computer or tab•in the browser.
let: Be sure the camera is connected to the same local-area network (LAN) as the computer or tablet (P 293).
• The camera clock is not set to the correct date: Set the camera
clock to the correct date (day, month, and year).
• Delete the browser history and/or cache.
• The connection is not high speed: Be sure both the camera
and the computer or tablet are connected to the network
The browser is slow
via Ethernet or high-speed (e.g., 5 GHz) wireless.
to update the view
The browser is configured to prioritize image quality over per•through the camera
formance: Select real-time performance for “Display withlens.
Image quality priority/Real-time performance priority” inthe browser remote recording menu (P 309).

Technical Notes

12449

ProblemSolution
The browser does not
display the same menus Automatic translation is enabled in the browser: Disable autoor other text as thematic translation.
camera.
• The camera root certificate has not been installed on the computer or tablet: Install the camera root certiﬁcate on the
The computer or tablet
computer or tablet (P 298).
cannot connect to the
The camera IP address has changed: The camera root certiﬁ•
camera via HTTPS.
cate must be reinstalled on the computer or tablet eachtime the camera’s IP address changes.
The computer orRoot certificates for some cameras have not been installed ontablet cannot connect
the computer or tablet: Install root certiﬁcates for all cameras
to multiple cameras via(P 298).
HTTPS.
• SERVER TYPE has not been set to HTTPS: Set SERVER TYPE
to HTTPS and import a root certiﬁcate.
A second or subsequent
Camera 1 is not selected in the “Choose camera” area: Select•camera cannot be
Camera 1 in the “Choose camera” area, and then connect
connected from a QR
and use the second or subsequent camera.
code.
• The browser is not allowed to access the tablet’s camera: Allow
the tablet’s browser to access the camera.

Technical Notes

12450

Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous
Problem

Solution• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert thebattery (P 43).

The camera is unresponsive.

• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged spare battery (P 50).

• The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connection.

• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
The camera does not
function as expected.
No sound.
Pressing the Q button
does not display thequick menu.

to unlock the controls (P 17, 19).
Remove and reinsert the battery (P 43). If the problem
persists, contact your Fujiﬁlm dealer.
Adjust the volume (P 338).
TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 175).

Technical Notes

12451

Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning

Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-chargedi (red)spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a fulj (blinks red)ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on ans (displayed in red withother subject at the same distance, then recompose thered focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the ﬂash for additional lightspeed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR
Camera malfunction. Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has beenformatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.

Technical Notes

12452

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning
LENS ERRORCARD ERRORPROTECTED CARD
BUSYb MEMORY FULL

Description
Turn the camera oﬀ, remove the lens, and check for foreign matter between the lens and the camera body, thenreplace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: Format the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory cardis damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If themessage is repeated, format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.

Technical Notes

12453

Warning

Description• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or

WRITE ERROR

FRAME NO. FULL

Technical Notes

12454

turn the camera oﬀ and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more freespace.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording movies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card andselect RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, thenselect CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning

Description• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The ﬁlecannot be viewed.

READ ERROR• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujiﬁlm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected
PROTECTED FRAME
picture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP
The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
DPOF FILE ERROR
any additional pictures you wish to print to another memory card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF
The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE
The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.

Technical Notes

12455

Warning Messages and Displays

Warning
Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether them CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a diﬀerent model of camera.
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature alp (yellow)
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the
STANDARD
camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool.
TEMPERATURE LIMITThe camera is approaching the maximum temperatureallowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPERburns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camera oﬀ and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
The camera temperature has reached the cutoﬀ point andp (red)the camera is about to turn oﬀ automatically. Turn the camHIGH TEMPERATURE
era oﬀ and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in picLIMIT REACHED
tures taken when this warning is displayed.
SHUTTING DOWNTechnical Notes

12456

Errors
If a C or B icon appears in the display, select INFORMATION >ERROR DESCRIPTION in the network/USB setting menu toview the error and then take the appropriate action.
Error
SolutionNOT CONNECTED TO
The wired LAN (Ethernet) cable is not connected: Connect the
NETWORK VIA ETHERNET
wired LAN (Ethernet) cable.
CABLE• No connection to access point: Conﬁrm that the access pointis on, verify its settings and IP address, and check that
there are no obstructions blocking its signal. If necessary,
NOT CONNECTED TO
move the camera closer to the access point.
NETWORK VIA WIRELESS
Camera settings have not been correctly adjusted for connec•
LANtion to the access point: Check that the password, encryption type, and SSID match those chosen for the accesspoint.
IP ADDRESS CANNOTBE ASSIGNED BY DHCP • No DHCP server: If there is no DHCP server on the network,
SERVER OR THERE IS AN enter the IP address and other information manually.
ISSUE WITH IP ADDRESS • The DHCP server is down: Contact the network administraSETTING PLEASE CHECK tor.
SETTINGSTechnical Notes

12457

ErrorSolution
DuplicateIPaddress:
Changethe camera IP address to en•sure that it does not duplicate the address of any otherdevice on the network.
• Invalid IP address: If the network includes a DHCP server,
select auto address allocation. If IP addresses are assigned
CANNOT REACH FTP
manually, check that the IP address is correct.
SERVER OR COMMUNIThe DNS server address is incorrect: If you conﬁgured the•
CATE WITH FTP SERVERDNS address manually, be sure the information you enPLEASE CHECK SETTINGS
tered is correct.
• FTP server settings are incorrect: Check that the server type,server address, port number, and proxy settings are correct.
• The FTP server is down: Contact the network administrator.
LOGIN TO FTP SERVER Incorrect user name or password: Check that you have supHAS FAILED
plied the correct user name and password.
• FTP server permissions are configured incorrectly: Check that
CANNOT TRANSFER
you have write access to the FTP server.
OR SAVE FILES TO FTP
The FTP server is full: Check the amount of free storage•
SERVER
space remaining on the FTP server.
The root certificate has expired: After conﬁrming that the
CA ROOT CERTIFICATE IS
camera clock is set to the correct time and date, load an
INVALID
updated CA root certiﬁcate.

Technical Notes

12458

Errors

Error

Solution
The
Frame.io
servermaybe
down: Check that the Frame.io•
server is up or try again later.
• The camera clock is not set to the correct time and date: Set thecamera clock.
Frame.io DISCONNECTED• The network is not configured correctly: Check the settings ofthe connected network.
• Turn the camera oﬀ and then on again.
• Contact the network administrator.
UNEXPECTED ERROR HAS • Turn the camera oﬀ and then on again.
OCCURRED• Contact the network administrator.

Technical Notes

12459

Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or numberof pictures available at different image sizes. All figures areapproximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, producing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
SD/CFexpress memory cards
64 GB

CapacityT
O 4∶3

RAW (UNCOMPRESSED)
PhotosRAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED)
RAW (COMPRESSED)
Movies *

V2160
W1080

SUPER FINE

FINE

NORMAL

1040

1560
300
590
880
79 minutes
79 minutes

2490* Assumes default bit rate.

O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with thesettings selected (P 72).

• Depending on the bit rate, shots saved to memory cards with a capacityof 32 GB or less may be recorded across multiple files without interruption.
The same is true of shots over an hour in length, independent of the bit
rate and memory card capacity.

Technical Notes

12460

Specifications
SystemModel
Product Number
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Storage media
Memory card slots
File system

FUJIFILM GFX100 II
FF230001
Approx. 102 million
43.8 mm × 32.9 mm Bayer array with primary color ﬁlter
Fujiﬁlm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC and CFexpress Type B
memory cards• SD memory card slot (UHS-II compliant) ×1• CFexpress memory card slot (Type B) ×1• Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compliant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, H.264, and ProRes• Audio (including voice memos):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only)• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)

Technical Notes

12461

System
Image size

O 4∶3 (11648 × 8736)
O 65∶24 (11648 × 4304)
O 3∶2 (11648 × 7768)
O 5∶4 (10928 × 8736)
O 16∶9 (11648 × 6552)
O 7∶6 (10192 × 8736)
O 1∶1 (8736 × 8736)
P 4∶3 (8256 × 6192)
P 65∶24 (8256 × 3048)
P 3∶2 (8256 × 5504)
P 5∶4 (7744 × 6192)
P 16∶9 (8256 × 4640)
P 7∶6 (7232 × 6192)
P 1∶1 (6192 × 6192)
Q 4∶3 (4000 × 3000)
Q 65∶24 (4000 × 1480)
Q 3∶2 (4000 × 2664)
Q 5∶4 (3744 × 3000)
Q 16∶9 (4000 × 2248)
Q 7∶6 (3504 × 3000)
Q 1∶1 (2992 × 2992)
RAW (11808 × 8754)
TIFF (11648 × 8736)
Lens mount
FUJIFILM G mountSensitivity• Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent toISO 80–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 40, 25600, 51200, or 102400• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 100–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 25600
Metering
256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control
Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Technical Notes

12
462

Specifications

SystemShutter speed

Continuous• MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ¼ s⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ¼ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC,
E-FRONT + ELECTRONIC⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s⁃ Modes S and M: 60 min. to ⁄ s⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
O The shutter speed ranges for continuous mode may
differ from those listed here.
Available frame advance rates (JPEG)CONTINUOUS
MECHANICALELECTRONIC
MODE
SHUTTERSHUTTERCH HIGH SPEED BURST
8.0, 5.0
5.3 *CL LOW SPEED BURST
2.0* In 35mm FORMAT MODE, the frame rate is 8.7 or 5.8

O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-

ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
card used.

Focus• Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/phase-detection AF)• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
White balanceFlash mode

463

Technical Notes

Self-timer

Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sunlight, shade, daylight ﬂuorescent, warm white ﬂuorescent,cool white ﬂuorescent, incandescent, underwater• Still pictures: Oﬀ, 2 sec., 10 sec.
• Movies: Oﬀ, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
• MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (highspeed sync)• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF12

System
Hot shoe

Provided (supports TTL ﬂash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ⁄ s
Sync contact
X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ⁄ s
Sync terminal
ProvidedElectronic viewfinder EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewﬁnder (supplied)(EVF)
LCD monitor• Rear monitor: 3.2-in/8.1 cm, 2360k-dot color LCD touch
screen with 3-way tilt
• Shoulder monitor: 2.09-in/5.31 cm, 219 × 320-dot memory
LCD monitor
Movies• Movie size: 7 2.76:1, 2 1.38:1, V 16:9, 6 17:9,(with stereo sound) 5 2.35:1, 4 17:9, 3 3:2, 3 16:9, V 16∶9, 1 17∶9,
W 16∶9, W 17∶9
O The size that can be selected depend on the
IMAGE FORMAT setting.

• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P• Recording/output format:- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 720, 360, 200, 100, or 50
Mbps)- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)- ProRes 422 HQ, ProRes 422, ProRes 422 LT (10-bit MOV
4 : 2 : 2)
- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with
Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)
High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 120P, 100P
Technical Notes

12
464

Specifications

Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jackHeadphone jack socket ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jackRemote release connector ⌀3.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector: USB Type-C® USB 10 Gbps
HDMI output
HDMI connector (Type A)
LAN connector
1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T

Technical Notes

12465

Power supply/otherPower supply
NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life
• Battery type: NP-W235• Lens: GF63mmF2.8 R WR
• External flash units: Disabled• Shooting mode: Mode P• AUTO POWER SAVE: ON
Number of shots
PERFORMANCELCD
EVF
BOOST 1
Approx. 500
Approx. 370
NORMAL
Approx. 540
Approx. 460
Number of shots (VG-GFX100II vertical battery grip)
PERFORMANCE
LCD
EVF
1
BOOST
Approx. 1360
Approx. 1010
NORMAL
Approx. 1470
Approx. 1240
Total length of footage that can be recorded ona single charge
Continuance
Actual battery life
battery life ofModeof movie capture
movie capture
Approx. 60 minutes
Approx. 80 minutes
V2
Approx. 60 minutes
Approx. 90 minutes
V3
Approx. 80 minutes
Approx. 140 minutes
W3
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 65 minutes–
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (120P) selected PERFORMANCE.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.
Technical Notes

CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level andthe ﬁgures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endurance will decline at low temperatures.

12466

Specifications

Power supply/other
Camera size
152.4 mm × 117.4 mm × 98.6 mm (46.5 mm excluding projections,(W × H × D)measured at thinnest part)/6.00 in. × 4.62 in. × 3.88 in. (1.83 in.)Camera weight
Approx. 949 g/33.5 oz., excluding battery, accessories, andmemory card
Shooting weight
Approx. 1030 g/36.3 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)

Technical Notes

Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)(center frequency)• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, Newzealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels): 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards
Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz(center frequency)

12467

EVF-GFX3 interchangeable electronic viewfinder
Type
OLED
Size
0.64-in/1.63 cm
Pixel countApproximately 9.44 million dots
Magnification
1.00× with 50 mm lens (35 mm format) at inﬁnity and diopter set to −1.0 m−1
Diagonal angle of Approximately 47° (horizontal angle of view approximately 38°)
view
Diopter adjustment −5 to +2 m−1
Eye point
Approximately 21 mm
Dimensions
52 mm × 37 mm × 78.9 mm/2.05 in. × 1.46 in. × 3.1 in.
(W × H × D)
WeightApprox. 91 g/3.2 oz.
NP-W235 rechargeable battery
Nominal voltage
7.2 V
Nominal capacity
2350 mAh
Rating capacity
2200 mAh
Operating
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
Dimensions
1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
(W × H × D)
WeightApprox. 79 g/2.8 oz.

Technical Notes

12
468

Specifications

AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer
Address

Model nameRated input
Input capacity
Rated output
Average active efficiency
Efficiency at load 10%
No-load power consumption
Operating temperature
WeightDongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AC-5VJ
100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Max. 50 VA
DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
84.8 %
84.2 %
0.02 W
0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.

O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.
Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in thismanual.

Technical Notes

12
469

MEMO

470

MEMO

471

7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPANhttps://fujifilm-x.com